Yamaha RXV661BL Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RXV661BL

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V661

Printed in Malaysia WJ69940

RX-V661

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V661_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 7:25 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-i

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

Important safety instructions

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Important safety instructions

Caution-ii

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution-iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then

disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Notice ....................................................................... 2

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Getting started ........................................................ 4

Quick start guide .................................................... 5

Connections ........................................................... 11

Optimizing the speaker setting

for your listening room .................................... 28

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28

Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33

Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33

Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36

Playback ................................................................ 37

Basic procedure ....................................................... 37

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38

Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 39

Displaying the current status of this unit

on a video monitor............................................... 39

Using your headphones............................................ 40

Muting the audio output........................................... 40

Playing video sources

in the background of an audio source.................. 40

Displaying the input source information ................. 40

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41

Sound field programs .......................................... 42

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42

Sound field program descriptions............................ 42

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decoding mode) .................................... 47

Using audio features ............................................. 48

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 2-channel stereo............................................... 49

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50

Manual tuning.......................................................... 50

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51

Selecting preset stations........................................... 52

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52

XM Satellite Radio tuning ................................... 53

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 53

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 54

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 56

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 57

Using iPod™.......................................................... 58

Controlling iPod™................................................... 58

Recording .............................................................. 60

Advanced sound configurations...........................61

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 61

Selecting decoders ................................................... 66

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........69

Using SET MENU................................................... 71

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 72

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 78

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 81

Remote control features........................................84

Using the remote control

for the SCENE feature......................................... 84

Controlling this unit, a TV,

or other components ............................................ 85

Setting remote control codes ................................... 87

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 88

Using multi-zone configuration............................89

Connecting Zone 2................................................... 89

Controlling Zone 2................................................... 90

Advanced setup......................................................92

Using the advanced setup ........................................ 92

Troubleshooting.....................................................96

Resetting the system............................................103

Glossary................................................................104

Sound field program information......................106

Parametric equalizer information .....................107

Specifications .......................................................108

Index .....................................................................110

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

List of remote control codes ................................. iii

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the parts.

NOTICE

2 En

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the

most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe

level. One that lets the sound come through loud and

clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,

most importantly, without affecting your sensitive

hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic

Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive

volume levels.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6”

are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

“96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

Notice

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the

parts.

•

The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

iPod

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 90 W + 90 W

Center: 90 W

Surround: 90 W + 90 W

Surround back: 90 W + 90 W

SCENE function

◆ 18 preset SCENE templates for various situations

◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability

◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support

component (some models only) working with the SCENE

function

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Mini-

Tuner Dock” sold separately)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in

a full surround sound experience

◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition

video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as

multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

◆ Playback information displaying capability

◆ Battery charging capability

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability includes

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video

→ component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2

using ZONE CONTROL

◆ Bi-amplification connection capability

◆ Sleep timer

Check that you received all of the following parts.

The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.

Features

Supplied accessories

Note

5678

+10

ENT

1234

TITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISPLAY

RETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

REC

SCENE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

TV VOL

TV CH

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

CBL

TUNER

V-AUX

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

STANDBY

POWER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

2 34

Remote control

Batteries (2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

Indoor FM antenna

GETTING STARTED

4 En

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

–the

TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light

becomes dim.

• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of

this unit must be set for your local voltage

BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE

SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and

create a potential fire hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a

straight slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Getting started

Notes

Caution

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Quick start guide

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speakers .................................... 2

❏ Center speaker ................................... 1

❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. Center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7

❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player ............................................... 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor........................................... 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable .............................................. 1

Select an RCA composite video cable.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 6

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

☞

P. 7

☞

P. 9

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

6 En

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)

cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.

Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

5 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

IN OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV/CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTL ETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

XMDOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

Center speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the surround

right speaker

To t he

surround back

left speaker

To the surround

left speaker

To the surround

back right speaker

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT jack

Subwoofer cable

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this

unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV/CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTL ETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

XMDOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

coaxial jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack

Video

input jack

Quick start guide

8 En

4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and

indoor FM antenna to this unit.

See page 24 for the connection information.

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and

you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply

of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for

details.

The type of the power plug is different depending on the models.

Note

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Open the lever

Insert

Close the lever

■ For further connections

• Using the other kind of speaker

combinations

☞ P. 12

• Connecting a video monitor via various

ways of the connection

☞ P. 18

• Connecting a DVD player via various ways

of the connection

☞ P. 19

• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital

video recorder

☞ P. 20

• Connecting a set-top box

☞ P. 20

• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or

a turntable

☞ P. 21

• Connecting an external amplifier

☞ P. 22

• Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-

channel audio connection

☞ P. 22

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock

☞ P. 23

• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

☞ P. 23

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front

panel

☞ P. 23

• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna

☞ P. 24

• Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

☞ P. 53

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3 Press

SCENE1 button.

“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,

and this unit automatically optimize own status for

the DVD playback.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while

this unit is in the SCENE mode.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has

capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE

OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can

automatically activate the DVD player and start playback

when you press the

SCENE1 button. Refer to the

instruction manual of the DVD player for further

information.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

When you change the input source or sound field program,

the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the

selected SCENE button turns off.

■ Using the other SCENE buttons

In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding

SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired

sources.

Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the

connected DVD player as the background

music for this room...”

Press

SCENE2 (or

SCENE2) to select “Disc

Listening”.

Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”

Press

SCENE3 (or

SCENE3) to select “TV

Viewing”.

Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the

FM/AM radio station...”

Press

SCENE4 (or

SCENE4) to select “Radio

Listening”.

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see

page 93).

Note

Quick start guide

10 En

• To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect

a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to

this unit in advance. See page 20 for details.

• To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to

tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the

tuning information.

• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM

loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM

antenna.

If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change

the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See

page 33 for details.

■ After using this unit...

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to

the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from

the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby

mode, press the desired

SCENE buttons (or

SCENE) or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or

POWER on the remote control). See page 25

for details.

Notes

What do you want to do with this

unit?

■ Customizing the SCENE templates

• Using various SCENE templates

☞ P. 33

• Creating your original SCENE templates

☞ P. 36

■ Using various input sources

• Basic controls of this unit

☞ P. 37

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs

☞ P. 50

• Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs

☞ P. 53

• Using your iPod with this unit.

☞ P. 58

■ Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs

☞ P. 42

• Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity

sound

☞ P. 48

• Customizing the sound field programs

☞ P. 61

■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

parameters for your listening room

(AUTO SETUP)

☞ P. 28

• Manually adjusting various parameters of

this unit manually

☞ P. 71

• Setting the remote control

☞ P. 84

• Adjusting the advanced parameters

☞ P. 92

■ Additional features

Automatically turning off this unit

☞ P. 41

CONNECTIONS

11 En

PREPARATION

English

Connections

Rear panel

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV /CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTLETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

XMDOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

TRIGGER

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

XM jack

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Connect the XM Mini-

Tuner Dock (sold

separately).

☞ P. 53

DOCK terminal

Connect a Yamaha iPod

universal dock

(sold separately).

☞ P. 23

AUDIO jacks

Connect the analog audio cable

plugs.

☞ P. 18-21

MULTI CH INPUT jacks

Connect the input source

component equipped with the

multi-channel output jacks.

☞ P. 22

ZONE 2 OUT jacks

Connect the amplifier in Zone 2.

☞ P. 89

PRE OUT jacks

Connect external amplifiers and an

active subwoofer.

☞ P. 22

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models

only)

☞ P. 4

HDMI connectors

Connect the HDMI components.

☞ P. 16

TRIGGER OUT

Outputs the control signals to external

components.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Connect the remote control

input and output jacks of the

Yamaha components.

☞ P. 23

Speaker terminals

Connect the speakers.

☞ P. 13

Video jacks

Connect the video cable

plugs.

☞ P. 18-20

AC OUTLET(S)

☞ P. 24

ANTENNA terminals

Connect the FM and AM

antenna.

☞ P. 24

DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT

jacks

Connect the digital audio

cable plugs.

☞ P. 19-21

12 En

Connections

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-

channel audio sources.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.

Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field

programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA

SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 72).

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction

of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is

not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front

speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

SBR

SBL

1.8 m (6 ft)

PRPL

1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,

groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable

to the “–” (black) terminals.

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage

this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front

panel display when you turn on this unit.

• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 93).

Note

SUB

WOOFER

PRE OUT

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

L L

R R

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Right

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

When you use single surround back speaker, connect

the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal

(SINGLE).

Left

Right

EXTRA SP terminals

Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or Zone 2 speakers.

To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72).

You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO

SETUP” (see page 29).

14 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except Europe, Asia and Korea models)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana

plug connector into the end of the

corresponding terminal.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections

to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-

amplification.

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To

activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”

to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 95).

When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the

shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the

instruction manuals of the speakers for details.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the

LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)

crossovers.

Note

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

FRONT A

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

This unit

Left

Right

Front speakers

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling

frequency.

• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the

fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This

cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See

pages 17 and 81 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y R PB P

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Notes

16 En

Connections

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI

connection (see page 41).

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16

feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear

PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224

MHz, 1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by

HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed

by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be

output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”

is set to “OTHER” (see page 77).

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the

AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video signal flow

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• This unit does not accept analog component video signals with

1080p of resolution.

• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and

HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded.

• This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video conversion ON (see page 81)

18 En

Connections

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack of this unit.

You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or

on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack

of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND

MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 77).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI

connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the

TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video

connection.

• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video

monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

PR PB

TV (or projector)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 81), be sure

to make the same type of video connections as those made for

your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV

to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

ZONE 2

ZONE

EDIT

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

VOLUM E

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

EFFECT

SILENT CINEMA

OFF

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

Optical

output

Video

output

S-Video

output

Audio

output

24 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM

antenna and AM loop antenna.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.

However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main

zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when

MASTER ON/

OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to

the OFF position. For information on the maximum power

or the total power consumption of the components that can

be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on

page 108.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33

ft) vinyl-covered wire

extended outdoors from a

window.

Connecting the power cable

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

(U.S.A. model)

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

Refer to the right column for details.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL on the

front panel and then press

MASTER ON/

OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this

unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector on the

front panel to select “SP IMP.”.

“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting

(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to save the new setting and turn off

this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF

on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on this

unit.

When you turns on this unit by pressing

MASTER

ON/OFF, the main zone is turned on.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Turning off this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF

on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

•

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are

operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed

inward to the ON position.

• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this

unit.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY

) to set the main zone to the

standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

POWER

)

to turn on the main zone.

• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing

SCENE (or

SCENE) buttons.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• These buttons are operational only when

MASTER ON/

OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers.

Note

TONE CONTROL

MASTER

OFF

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

Notes

26 En

Connections

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when

“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 54.

1B Input signal indicators

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct

Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital

audio signals.

2CD Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

3 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

selected (see page 46).

4 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16).

5 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 46).

6 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23)

and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK

indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the

battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode.

7 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

8 YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 28).

9 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite

Radio tuning mode (see pages 50 to 57).

0 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40).

A VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

E Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

F VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 46).

G Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40).

H SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

I ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 90).

J NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see

page 49).

K DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP

sound field programs are selected (see page 42).

Front panel display

Note

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

q PL

q EX

q PL

ENHANCER

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA

ZONE2 NIGHT

DOCK

AUTO

YPAO

TUNED

MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q PL x

DSD

neural

A B

96/24

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

STEREO

GB DC F I J ML

NKE

4 65 8 9 A2 3 0

D........ U.S.A. and Canada models only

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

L Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

M SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41).

N 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

O Input channel and speaker indicators

LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE

signal.

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Light up according to the number of presence and

surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”

(see page 72) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 73) in

“SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup

(see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 74) procedure.

• You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically

by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by

adjusting settings for “SB L/R SP” (see page 73) in “SOUND

MENU”.

• To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to

“PRESENCE” (see pages 29 or 72).

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Infrared window (

)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

Operation mode selector (

)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 86).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

PHONO (see page 85).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 87.

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Surround back speaker indicators

L CR

SL SB SR

LFE

LFE indicator

Using the remote control

Notes

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM

28 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that

appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual

uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector

on the remote control to

AMP.

• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker

terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.

1 Make sure of the following check points

before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

The following menu screen appears on the video

monitor.

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be

when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the

attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone

to the tripod (etc.).

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

VIDEO AUX

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

Omni-directional

microphone

AUTO:MENU

PRESENCENONE

. EXTRASPASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONTB



SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

START

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

[

Optimizer microphone

29 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

4 Press

l / h to select the desired setting

for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press

Extra speaker assignment

EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE

• When you use the alternative front speaker

system (see page 38)

Select “FRONT B”.

• When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see

page 90)

Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers

to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2

speakers by using the internal amplifier.

• When you use the presence speakers (see

page 12)

Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the

speakers to the presence speakers.

• When you do not use the EXTRA SP

terminals

Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP

terminals.

If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 95), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN”.

5 Press

l / h to select “SETUP”.

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the previous

settings.

• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”

settings and restore the previous settings.

• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”

parameters to the initial factory settings.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have

previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change

the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see

page 95) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU”

(see page 72).

6 Press

l / h to select the desired setting of

“EQ” and then press

Parametric equalizer type EQ

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified

frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the

crucial frequency bands for the listening room and

adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can

select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment

from the following choices.

Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT

• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency

response of all speakers with higher frequencies

being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT

setting sounds a little harsh.

• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response

of all speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response

of each speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your front

speakers are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

7 Press

n to select “START” and then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test

tones are output from each speaker during the auto

setup procedure. Once all items are set, the

“AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD.

• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in

the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes

for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.

Note

Notes

30 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

This unit performs the following checks:

Speaker wiring WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker.

Speaker size SIZE

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Speaker distance DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Equalizing EQUALIZING

Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the

speakers by the setting of “EQ”.

Speaker level LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

The display changes as follows.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as

follows.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 4.

• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are

output.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,

the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen

appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on

page 32.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the

number of warning messages appears in the above of

“RESULT” (see page 32).

• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR

PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”

procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 74) is automatically set to

“REVERSE”.

8 Press

ENTER to display the setup results

in detail.

AUTO:MENU

PRESENCENONE

EXTRASPASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONTB



SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

. START

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

[

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO:CHECK

INITIALIZING

. WIRING

SIZE/DISTANCE

EQUALIZING

LEVEL

CHECKCH=CENTER

|||||;;;;;;;;

[]:Exit

[

Notes

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

31 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

9 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 69).

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the

same frequency to provide finer adjustments.

10 Press

ENTER to return to the top

“AUTO:RESULT” display.

11 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”

and “CANCEL” and then press

l / h to

select “SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

12 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

13 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from

this unit.

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it

away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top

of this unit.

If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to

recalibrate your system.

Notes

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the setting of

each speaker size

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

Results of the speaker

output level

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO:RESULT

 RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

32 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

■ If an error screen appears

Press

k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or

“EXIT” and then press

ENTER.

The following display is an example where “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

“AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages

to correct your speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press

ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 101.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “–

–” is displayed instead.

3 Press

ENTER to return to the top

“AUTO:RESULT” display.

Note

AUTO:ERROR

. E-9:USER CANCEL

Don't operate

any function.

>RETRY EXIT

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

[

AUTO:RESULT

RESULT

. WARNING(3)

>SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

WARNING:W-1

Reverse Channel

FL --

CENTER

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SBR

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES

33 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with 18 preset SCENE templates for

various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory

setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to

each SCENE button:

SCENE 1: DVD Viewing

SCENE 2: Disc Listening

SCENE 3: TV Viewing

SCENE 4: Radio Listening

If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select

the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template

library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE

buttons on the front panel and the remote control.

1 Press and hold the

SCENE (or

SCENE)

button for 3 seconds.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the

front panel starts to flash, and the name of the

currently assigned SCENE template appears in the

front panel display.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press

l / h) to select the desired

template.

3 Press the

SCENE (or

SCENE) button

again to confirm the selection.

The selected SCENE template is assigned to the

SCENE button.

• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds

from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is

automatically canceled.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 84 for details.

Selecting the SCENE templates

Selecting the desired SCENE

template

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the

SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

DVD Viewing

Remote control

Flashes

3 seconds

Front panel

Notes

DVD MovieView

Remote control

Front panel

34 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?

You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details.

Radio Listening

CD Hifi Listening

CD Listening

CD Music Listening

XM Listening

iPod Listening

DVD Live Viewing

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD Viewing

Disc Hifi Listening

Music Disc Listening

Disc Listening

DVR Viewing

TV Viewing

Action Game Playing

RPG Playing

DVD

V-AUX

PHONO

DTV/CBL

TUNER (FM/AM)

DOCK

DVD

DVR

Video sources

(DVD video,

Recorded video)

TV programs

Video games

iPod

Radio programs

Music discs (CD,

SACD or DVD-Audio)

SCENE templates

Which component do you

like for playback?

Vinyl records

Which source do you like to

play back?

LP Record Listening

Default

SCENE buttons

To enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs, you need to connect

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) and activate the service (see

page 53).

TV Sports Viewing

To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 58).

35 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions

The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting.

When the connected DVD player or CD player has the

capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to

the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the

DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.

You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod

is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this

unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is

stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects

“DOCK” as the input source automatically.

SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features

DVD Viewing

DVD

STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you play back general

contents on the DVD player.

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD

MOVIE

Sci-Fi

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your DVD player.

DVD Live Viewing

DVD

ENTERTAINMENT

Music Video

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live

video on your DVD player.

DVR Viewing

DVR MOVIE Drama

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your digital video recorder.

Disc Hifi Listening

DVD

PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high

fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player.

Music Disc

Listening

DVD

STEREO

2ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

discs on your DVD player.

Disc Listening

DVD

STEREO

7ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

sources on your DVD player as the background music.

CD Hifi Listening

PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high

fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player.

CD Listening

STEREO

2ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

discs on your CD player.

CD Music Listening

STEREO

7ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

source on your CD player as the background music.

Radio Listening

TUNER MUSIC

ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM

radio programs.

XM Listening

XM MUSIC

ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite

Radio programs.

iPod Listening

DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC

ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you play back music on

your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock.

TV Viewing

DTV/CBL STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general

programs on your TV.

TV Sports Viewing

DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports

programs on your TV.

Action Game

Playing

V-AUX*

ENTERTAINMENT

Action Game

Select this SCENE template when you play action games

such as car racing and FPS games.

RPG Playing

V-AUX*

ENTERTAINMENT

Roleplaying Game

Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing

games.

LP Record Listening

PHONO PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl

records on your turntable.

36 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

You can create your original SCENE templates for each

SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 18 SCENE

templates to create the original SCENE templates.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press and hold the desired

SCENE button for 3 seconds.

The SCENE template customizing screen appears on

the video monitor.

When the SCENE template you want to customize is not

assigned to any of the

SCENE buttons, press

l / h

repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the

menu screen.

3 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

of the SCENE template and then

l / h to

select the desired value of the selected

parameter.

You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE

template:

• INPUT: The input source component.

• MODE: The active sound field programs,

STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode.

• NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49).

− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening

mode.

− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the

CINEMA mode.

− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the

MUSIC mode.

4 Press the

SCENE button again to confirm

the edit.

An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE

template.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding

SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 84 for details.

• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE

button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,

this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with

the new one.

• The newly created template is only available for the assigned

SCENE button.

■ Rename the SCENE templates

Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3

of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and

then press

ENTER.

•Press

k / n to select the desired character.

•Press

l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the

space or the desired character.

•Press

RETURN to cancel the new name.

•Press

ENTER to confirm the new name.

Creating your original SCENE

templates

Note

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

Create an original SCENE

template



[RETURN]:STATUS

[SCENE1]:SET

[ENTER]:Rename

NIGHT:SYSTEM



MODE:STRAIGHT

INPUT: DVD

.pDVDViewing[



SCENE1

[

Notes

PLAYBACK

37 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on

the remote control to

AMP.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

See page 40 to display the input source information.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (

)) to select

the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.

The corresponding input selector button on the remote

control for the currently selected input source lights up for

approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the

remote control, showing which source component is

currently being operated.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 50 for details about tuning instructions.

• See page 54 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instructions.

4 Rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/

–) to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

• See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker.

• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume

level (see page 77).

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

one of the sound field program selector

buttons (

) repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display. See page 42 for details

about sound field programs.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 38).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• To display information about the currently selected sound

field program in the OSD, see page 61 for details.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to

“DTS” before the playback (see page 80).

Basic procedure

INPUT:DVD

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

Currently selected input

source

Available input sources

Note

Sci-Fi

Currently selected sound field program

38 En

Playback

■ A quick guide to contents

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input

source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector to select MULTI CH

(or

MULTI CH IN).

“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.

Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 80).

Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be

selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source.

Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT

A and/or FRONT B) on or off.

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front

speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or

EXTRA SP speaker terminals.

The active front speaker set changes as follows:

• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or

“NONE” (see page 72).

• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front

speaker setting.

■ Using the Zone B feature

When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 72),

you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP

speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.

When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in

the main room are muted.

• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers

simultaneously.

• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate

the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates

automatically (see page 46).

When you want to...

See

page

Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48

Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48

Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 61

Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49

Use headphones 40

Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49

Select a decoder to play back sources with 66

Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

Selecting the front speaker set

Notes

FRONT A

FRONT B

FRONT A

and

FRONT B

OFF

39 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input

jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the

same input source.

• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”

in most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 82).

Press

AUDIO SELECT (or

AUDIO SEL)

repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack

select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jacks

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,

HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when

the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not used. Use “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective

input jack (see page 78).

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

DISPLAY on the remote

control.

The current status screen appears in the OSD.

You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter

in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).

The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks and

will not be recorded.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:(1) HDMI (2) Digital

signals (3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order: (1) Digital signals input

at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals

input at the OPTICAL jack. When no

signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

A.SEL:AUTO

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

Currently selected audio input jack select setting

Available input sources

Displaying the current status of

this unit on a video monitor

Note



NIGHT:OFF



A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD



Sci-Fi

MOVIE

STATUSVOL:-40.0dB

40 En

Playback

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 46).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME on the front panel or press

VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 76).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (

) on the

remote control to select a video source and then

an audio source.

Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input source

of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 80).

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press

l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information displays.

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

SEARCH MODE

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY

TUNING

ON/OFF

CONTROL

AUTO/MA N'L

DISPLAY

ZONE 2

ZONE

EDIT

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

VOLUM E

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

EFFECT

SILENT CINEMA

OFF

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Displaying the input source

information

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

Audio sources

Video sources

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

41 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

4 Press

SET MENU on the remote control

again to exit from “SET MENU”.

■ Audio information

“---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

■ Video information

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24).

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SLEEP repeatedly to set the

amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is

set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound field

program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press

SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly

until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel

display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY (or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main

zone to the standby mode.

FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or

PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders.

Note

HDMI RES.

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or

output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this

unit.

HDMI ERROR

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices. See page 101

for details.

Using the sleep timer

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP120min

Flashes

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEPOFF

Disappears

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

42 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from

the front, back, left and right.

• You can change sound field parameters. See page 61 for details.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (

)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 38).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher

than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Sound field indicators

DIALG. LIFT

SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLYS.INIT. DLY

P.ROOM SIZE

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

P.INIT. DLY

DSP LEVEL

MOVIE

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

Available sound field parameters (see page 63)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Created sound

fields

Category of the

program

CINEMA DSP

HiFi DSP

Presence sound field

Listening position

Surround left

sound field

Surround right

sound field

Surround back sound field

43 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48).

• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

Notes

CLASSICAL Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal

standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is

at the center left of the arena.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left

of the hall.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a

sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

44 En

Sound field programs

■ For various sources

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

■ For visual sources of music

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

Notes

ENTERTAINMENT Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,

the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an

optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Action Game

This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range

per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining

a clear sense of directions.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game

This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field

designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

Notes

ENTERTAINMENT Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot

live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to

the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

HiFi DSP

45 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 66 for details.

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

Notes

MOVIE Standard

This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel

audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded

by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

DSP LEVEL

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

S.LIVENESS

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

SB LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very

small to extremely large sound.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The

reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear

words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. RO O M S I Z E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.

The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound

depth.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

46 En

Sound field programs

■ Stereo playback

The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

■ The Compressed Music Enhancer

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 73),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 42).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 38).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see

page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47).

Note

STEREO 2ch STEREO

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details.

DIRECT

STEREO

STEREO 7ch STEREO

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2

channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,

etc.

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a

compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system.

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo.

Effect level

STEREO

HiFi DSP

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Effect level

ENHANCER

Note

Notes

47 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources (Straight decoding mode)

STRAIGHT

USING AUDIO FEATURES

48 En

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on

the remote control to

AMP.

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode

is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with

the least circuitry.

Press

PURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.

The

PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit

is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display

automatically dims.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level

settings)

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front left and right speaker channels.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the

surround speakers may not match.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is

selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input

source.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see

page 74).

1 Press

LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Once you press

LEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing

k / n.

• Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is

displayed if “SB L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or

“LRGx1” (see page 73).

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Using audio features

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SUR.B.L

Surround back left speaker

SUR.B.R

Surround back right speaker

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

49 En

Using audio features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Press

STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 74).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

• See page 66 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”

mode.

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night.

1 Press

NIGHT on the remote control

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the effect level while

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is

displayed in the front panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following

cases:

–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected.

–when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see

page 38).

–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness

depending on the input source and surround sound settings

you use.

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

Selecting the night listening mode

Effect.Lvl:MID

Notes

FM/AM TUNING

50 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once

to begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

• Press

h to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press

l to tune into a lower frequency.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

tune into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Note

Automatic tuning

AFM88.9MHz

AUTO

Lights up

No colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

AFM88.9MHz

No colon (:)

51 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order. You can then recall any preset station easily by

selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select “FM” as the

reception band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations. Press

A/B/C/D/E and then

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you

perform step 3 to select the preset station number under

which the first station will be stored.

• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store

FM stations automatically. Press

PRESET/TUNING

so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel

display and then press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l after

pressing and holding

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning” below.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 50 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY on the front panel.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

3 Press

A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

Automatic preset tuning

A1:FM88.9MHz

AUTO MEMORY

Flashes

Notes

Manual preset tuning

MEMORY

Flashes

A:FM88.9MHz

MEMORY

Preset station

group

Flashes

Colon (:)

52 En

FM/AM tuning

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

select a preset station number (1 to 8) while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

• Press

h to select a higher preset station number.

• Press

l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press

MEMORY while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, set the

operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press TUNER

to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press

A/B/C/D/E (or press

A-E/CAT. l /

h) to select the desired preset station group

(A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) to select the desired preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel.

See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.

2 Press and hold

EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/

E and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.

4 Press

EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Notes

Selecting preset stations

A1:FM88.9MHz

MEMORY

Preset station number

Flashes

A1:FM88.9MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

Exchanging preset stations

A1:FM88.9MHz

E1:FM88.9MHz

MEMORY

Flashes

A5:FM88.9MHz

MEMORY

Flashes

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its

passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much

more.

For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com.

For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM

Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee

may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to

Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in

the property of their respective owners.

Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.

For details, see the operating instructions provided with

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”

(see page 83) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level

in the OSD. For the best reception, orient the connected the XM

Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the

XM Mini-Tuner Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on

the rear panel of this unit properly.

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Note

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock

(sold separately)

Note

54 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to

your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on

the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.

Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for

reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-

2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal

from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation

normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods

you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for

up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on

your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more

information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at

www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GET-

XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on

the remote control to

SOURCE.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 55.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 55.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 55.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” on page 55.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM

HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio

broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 67).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 56).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the OSD (see page 57).

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

Note

[001] Preview

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

Lights up

55 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front

panel display, select channel “0”.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front

panel (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 56.

The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is

“[001] Preview”.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (

■ Direct number access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (

) as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

ENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing

ENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit

confirms the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter

a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or

ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode

procedure.

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector

on the remote control to

SOURCE.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM>123

56 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 55.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 54 for details.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

XM MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

MEMORY (or

XM MEMORY) to

set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel

as a preset channel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

cleared.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

Note

[043] XMU

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

C [043] XMU

MEMORY

Currently selected preset channel group

Flashes

Note

C5 [043] XMU

MEMORY

Currently selected preset channel number

Flashes

C5:[043] XMU

Colon (:)

57 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 96 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY) repeatedly to

toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

When the channel number / name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 81).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

If you press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY) while the XM

Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left

in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information

display mode toggles as described above.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY).

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To turn off the OSD, press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY)

again.

• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in

the OSD.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press

ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press

TITLE on the

remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is hold.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

Channel number / name

Channel category

Artist name / Song title

[043] XMU

<CAT>ROCK

Coldplay / Clo

Note

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM :043

CHAN :XMU

CAT :Rock

NAME :Coldplay

TITLE:Speed of sound

.( Coldplay/Spe)

[ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL

[ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY

[

USING IPOD™

58 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 86.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 101.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or

not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 83). The

DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod

in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for

your iPod to suit your personal preferences.

• The name of the song being played also appears in the front

panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 81).

• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your

iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in

the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between

the “Settings” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Notes

59 En

Using iPod™

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press

DISPLAY on

the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod

menu and then press

ENTER to begin

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears

in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”

appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of

songs are being repeated.

■ The function of the play information

display

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the artist

3 Name of the album

4 Name of the song

5 Progress bar

6 Elapsed time

7 Shuffle and repeat icons

8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward)

and w (search backward)

9 Remaining time

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

1 All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

RECORDING

60 En

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 74) and the sound field programs (see page 42)

do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (

)) to select

the source component you want to record

from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Caution

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and

adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your

DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from the player.

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

61 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see

page 82). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,

set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

DISPLAY on the remote

control.

The following status screen appears in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons (

) repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press

k / n to select the desired sound

field parameter and then

l / h to change

the selected sound field parameter value.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 63.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press

k / n to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold

l / h to change the sound field

parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown

momentarily in the front panel display.

• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to

initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a

sound field program group (see page 82).

• You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 81).

5 Press

DISPLAY to turn off the sound field

parameter display.

Advanced sound configurations

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note



NIGHT:OFF



A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD



Sci-Fi

MOVIE

STATUSVOL:-40.0dB

PARAMETER

MOVIE

.  Sci-Fi 1/2

PROLOGIC

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;16ms

P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;20ms

[RETURN]:STATUS

Cursor

62 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details.

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/

or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP LEVEL)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• The effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• You cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• The sound is vague.

• You feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(DIALG.LIFT)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”

is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

The DSP effect

sound level is low.

The DSP effect sound

level is high.

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position.

Move up to the ideal dialogue position.

63 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations

Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the

apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the

first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to

the listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding

room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP

programs.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

64 En

Advanced sound configurations

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding

initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP

programs.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual

walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of

a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one

which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to

as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter

lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

65 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

66 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs (Decoder Type)

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field

program.

Available decoders

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the desired surround

decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY

and then

k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the

desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the

selected parameter by pressing

l / h repeatedly on the

remote control.

2ch Stereo

DIRECT

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi

stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the

subwoofer in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 72).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 73) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 72).

7ch Stereo

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence

right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The

available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.

Control range: 0 to 100%

2ch Enhancer

7ch Enhancer

2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals

of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Sound field parameter Features

Decoder Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro

Logic II) processing for movie

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder

is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 73).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Selecting decoders

67 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND

DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.

SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Movie

PL II Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 73).

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Music

PL II Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 73).

PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Game

PL II Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”

is set to “NONE” (see page 73).

CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION

PLIIMusic

PLIIxMusic

SURROUND DECODE

PANORAMA

SUR.DECODE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not

available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73).

Available sound field parameters (see page 63)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Category of the

program

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

C. IMAGE

SURROUND DECODE

Neural Sur.

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Neural Surround processing for any sources.

The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2-

channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-

incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of

XM Satellite Radio.

SUR.DECODE

68 En

Advanced sound configurations

Decoder parameter descriptions

Decoder parameter Features

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

DIMENSION

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

CENTER WIDTH

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DTS Neo:6 Music

C.IMAGE

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Initial setting: 0.3

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

69 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover

frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the distance of each speaker.

D)EQUALIZER

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.

H)HDMI SET

Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.

I)EXTD SUR.

Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

Parameter Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

C)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each input source.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear

panel of this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the multi channel input.

70 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Option menu 3 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40).

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on

the power of this unit.

D)PARAM.INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

E)ZONE 2 SET

Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters.

F)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals.

G)DOCK SET

Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in

the standby mode.

71 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• Press

RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”

and then

ENTER to enter “MANUAL

SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

3 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

5 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

and then

l / h to change the parameter

settings.

6 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

Using SET MENU

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

. 1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 1/2

. A)SPEAKER SET

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

E)LFE LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 2/2

. F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET

H)HDMI SET

I)EXTD SUR.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOUND MENU

E)LFE LEVEL

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

72 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU

parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO

SETUP (see page 28).

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE

When you use the alternative front speaker

system (see page 38)

Select “FRONT B”.

When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see

page 90)

Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to

the Zone 2 speakers.

When you use the presence speakers (see

page 12)

Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the

speakers to the presence speakers.

When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals

Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP

terminals.

• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”.

• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 95), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.

• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out

“AUTO SETUP” again (See page 28).

FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B

The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.

Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B

speakers.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off

when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room.

• Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in

another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B

is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer

in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound

at the FRONT B terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP

terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to

“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode (see page 46).

Presence/Surround back channel priority

PRIORITY

The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you

set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.

Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the

surround back speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP

sound field programs.

Choices: PRNS, SUR. B

• Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channels will be output from the

surround speakers.

• Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers

when surround back channel signals are detected in a

CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals

are output from the front speakers.

1 SOUND MENU

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 1/2

. A)SPEAKER SET

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

E)LFE LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 2/2

. F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET

H)HDMI SET

I)EXTD SUR.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOUND MENU

. EXTRA SP ASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONT B

PRESENCE NONE

FRONT B;;;;FRONT

PRIORITY;;;;;---

ZONE2 SET

Not Available

Notes

73 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

When the front speakers are large

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the front speakers are small

Select “SMALL” (small).

When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 72), you

can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of

“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,

this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the center speaker is large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the center speaker is small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the surround speakers are large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the surround speakers are small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the surround speakers

Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R

SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.

Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2

When the surround back left and right

speakers are large

Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

large

Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).

When the surround back left and right

speakers are small

Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

small

Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).

When you do not use the surround back

speakers

Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel

signals are directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Note

SOUND MENU

FRONT SP

SMALL >LARGE

SOUND MENU

CENTER SP

NONE >SML LRG

SOUND MENU

SUR. L/R SP

NONE >SML LRG

SOUND MENU

SUR.B L/R SP

SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1

74 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get natural bass sound

Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well

as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get rich bass sound

Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of

any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE

signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to

the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front

left and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

When you do not use a subwoofer

Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the

low-frequency signals of the front left and right

channels, and the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed

to the front left and right speakers regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

Bass crossover CROSSOVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see page 73). All frequencies below

the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to

the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER

SET” (see page 73).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each

speaker.

Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R SP”

is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73).

SOUND MENU

LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR FRNT>BOTH

SOUND MENU

CROSSOVER

FREQ;;;80Hz

SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusted speaker

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

Presence left speaker

Presence right speaker

Notes

SOUND MENU

SUBWOOFER PHASE

>NORMAL REVERSE

SOUND MENU

B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2

__________

. FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

C;;;;;;;;;;

SWFR;;;;;;;;;;

75 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/

PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB L/R

SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73).

■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer

adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28).

• Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5-

frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal

quality of the center speaker matches that of the front

left and right speakers. Press

k / n to display the

graphic equalizer screen.

• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.

When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28),

“AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting.

Test tone TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”

while listening to a test tone.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and

front left speakers.

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

Notes

SOUND MENU

C)SP DISTANCE 1/2

. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONT L;;;10.0ft

FRONT R;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;10.0ft

SWFR;;;;;;10.0ft

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[

Note

SOUND MENU

D)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

. CENTER GEQ

[ ]/[]:CT GEQ

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

SOUND MENU

. TEST >OFF ON

______

100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

76 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ

Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with

that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5

frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and

10 kHz).

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Press

k / n to select a frequency band and

l / h to adjust

the selected frequency band.

The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when

“CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.

■ Low-frequency effect level

E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 72),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

Speaker SP

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Adjusts the headphone compression.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 40).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Note

SOUND MENU

TEST >OFF ON

______

. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

SOUND MENU

E)LFE LEVEL

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

SOUND MENU

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

. SP: MIN STD>MAX

HP: MIN STD>MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

SOUND MENU

G)AUDIO SET

. MUTING TYPE;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

MAX VOL.;+16.5dB

INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

77 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX

VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes

–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.

Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX

VOL.” setting.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial

Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB

and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume

level in Zone 2 (see page 83).

Initial volume INI VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting.

• Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level

in Zone 2 (see page 83).

■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio

signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected

to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Choices: RX-V661, OTHER

• Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals

on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the

HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

• Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

■ Extended surround decoders

I)EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the

connected surround back speakers.

Mode MODE

Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving.

Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to

play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal

flag that can be recognized by this unit is input.

• Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using

the selected decoder type in “TYPE”.

• Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Decoder type TYPE

Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back

multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”.

Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX

• Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or

DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

movie decoder.

• Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or

DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

music decoder.

• Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX

or DTS-ES decoder.

• Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX

decoder.

Notes

SOUND MENU

H)HDMI SET

SUPPORT AUDIO:

RX-V661

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

[ENTER]:Return

Note

SOUND MENU

I)EXTD SUR.

. MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

SOUND MENU

I)EXTD SUR.

. MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON

TYPE;;;PL xMovieII

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

78 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when

this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources

correctly.

• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the

speakers and the input sources.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:

– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 73) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see

page 73) is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when this unit is in the stereo playback, Compressed Music

Enhancer (see page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode.

– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 95).

• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to

“AUTO”.

Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the

input mode or rename the input source.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

The input source name in parentheses indicates the default

assigned input source.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C

CMPNT-V INPUT

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

Notes

2 INPUT MENU

MANUAL SETUP

2 INPUT MENU

. A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

E)MULTI CH SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

INPUT MENU

CMPNT-V INPUT

. [A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL))

[C];;;;; DVR

( DVR )

79 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1

OPTICAL OUT

Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, VCR, DVR

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4

OPTICAL IN

Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN

Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR, VCR

(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR, VCR

For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN

Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

• This feature is useful when you change the input or output

assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.

• You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the

Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons (

)

on the remote control to select the input

source you want to change the name of.

2 Press

l / h to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

3 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press

l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

•Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press

ENTER on the remote control to exit

from “INPUT RENAME”.

Notes

INPUT MENU

OPTICAL OUT

. (1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )

INPUT MENU

OPTICAL IN

. (2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )

(3);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )

INPUT MENU

COAXIAL IN

. (5);;;;; CD

(CD)

(6);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA

Notes

INPUT MENU

HDMI IN

. [IN1];;; DVD

( DVD )

[IN2];;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL))

INPUT MENU

B)INPUT RENAME

DVD -> MY DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Chara.

[

80 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input

source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD,

DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK,

MULTI CH

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed

to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.

• The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and

the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source

appears in the OSD.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Decoder select mode

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to

automatically detect the type of input signals and select

the appropriate decoder mode.

• Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used for the connected

input source.

DTS decoder prioritize setting

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

■ Multi channel input settings

E)MULTI CH SET

Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel

input.

BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST,

OFF

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select

the last selected video source as the background video

source.

• Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video

source in the background.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

• Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.

• Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.

Front input FRONT

If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the

analog jacks at which the front signals from an external

decoder will be input.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR, VCR

See page 22 for the connection information.

The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT

CH” to “8CH”.

INPUT MENU

C)VOLUME TRIM

MY DVD

DVD -> 0.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[RETURN]:Exit

[

INPUT MENU

D)DECODER MODE 1/2

. >AUTO LAST

CD ;;;;AUTO

MD/CD-R ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

Note

INPUT MENU

E)MULTI CH SET

. BGV;;;;; LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;6CH

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

INPUT MENU

E)MULTI CH SET

. BGV;;;;; LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;8CH

FRONT;;; DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

81 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –

4 to 0

Control step: 1

•Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

•Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and

component video signals interchangeably.

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted to component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a

game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals

even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press

l to raise the position of the OSD.

• Press

h to lower the position of the OSD.

Source feature OSD display time

OSD-SOURCE

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD

after you perform a certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during

an operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Amplifier function OSD display time

OSD-AMP

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

status and sound field parameters information screen after

you perform a certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an

operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

3 OPTION MENU

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 1/2

. A)DISPLAY SET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)PARAM. INI

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 2/2

. E)ZONE2 SET

F)XM RADIO SET

G)DOCK SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET 1/2

. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VIDEO CONV.;;;ON

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET 2/2

. OSD-SOURCE;;;30s

OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s

FL SCROLL;;;CONT

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

82 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– sound field program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

– SCENE template parameters

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate audio input jack select setting.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last audio input jack select setting used for

the connected input source.

■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

factory settings.

Press the corresponding sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control to select the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field

program names that have been changed from their initial

factory settings.

Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,

ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.

■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET

Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2.

Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and

then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.

Note

OPTION MENU

B)MEMORY GUARD

>OFF ON

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

OPTION MENU

C)AUDIO SELECT

>AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

Notes

OPTION MENU

D)PARAM. INI

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

*ENTERTAINMENT

*MOVIE

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

ENHANCER

Press DSP Key

OPTION MENU

E)ZONE2 SET

. MAX VOL.;+16.5dB

INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

83 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the

power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting.

• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 72), “Zone 2 SP Not

Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”

parameter is not available.

• The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.

■ XM Radio setting F)XM RADIO SET

XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 53). For the best

reception, orient the XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of

60% or more is displayed here.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not

connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections

(see page 53).

■ iPod universal dock setting G)DOCK SET

Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 58).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby

mode.

• Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod only when this unit is turned on.

Notes

Note

OPTION MENU

F)XM RADIO SET

XM ANTENNA;;;95%

[ENTER]:Return

OPTION MENU

G)DOCK SET

STANDBY CHARGE:

AUTO

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

84 En

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 87).

■ Controlling the input source

components in the SCENE mode

You can operate both this unit and the input source

component by using the remote control. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 87).

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below

to control the input source component of the

selected SCENE template.

These buttons control the input source component. See page 86

for details of the function of each button.

■ Setting the input source of the

customized SCENE template on the

remote control

If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE

template, you must set the input source of the SCENE

template on the remote control to operate the input source

component correctly.

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press and hold the

SCENE button and the

desired input selector button (

The

TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

3 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in

step 2 until the

TRANSMIT indicator

flashes twice again.

If the setting of the input source is not successful, the

TRANSMIT indicator flashes repeatedly. In this case,

repeat the setup procedure.

Remote control features

Using the remote control for the SCENE feature

Note

5678

+10

ENT

1234

TITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISPLAY

RETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

REC

SCENE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

TV VOL

TV CH

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

STANDBY

POWER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

2 34

Set to

SOURCE

SCENE

buttons

Note

85 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP to control this

unit.

These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to

AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to

TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see

page 87). When you set the remote control codes for both

DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for

DTV/CBL.

These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to

TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable

TV” column on page 86.

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

5678

+10

ENT

1234

TITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISPLAY

RETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

REC

SCENE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

TV VOL

TV CH

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

STANDBY

POWER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

2 34

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns the power on or off.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

5678

+10

ENT

1234

TITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISPLAY

RETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

REC

SCENE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

TV VOL

TV CH

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

STANDBY

POWER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

2 34

86 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons.

You must set the appropriate remote control code for each

input source in advance (see page 87). The following table

shows the function of each control button used to control

other components assigned to each input selector button.

Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate

the selected component.

The remote control has 10 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 10

different components.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 87).

Press and hold to search backward or forward.

Simple remote mode (see page 58).

1234

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

TV VOL

TV CH

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X

DOCK

DVR

VCR

PHONO

STANDBY

POWER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

5678

+10

ENT

1234

TITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

SLEEP

DISPLAY

RETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

REC

SCENE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

2 34

Remote

control

DVD

player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD player CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner iPod

1 AV POWER

Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)

3 TITLE

Title Band

4 PRESET/CH

VCR channel

Up Preset up (1-8) Up

PRESET/CH

Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)

Down

A-E/CAT. l Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

Previous menu

A-E/CAT. h Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

Subsequent

ENTER Enter Enter

Subsequent

5 RETURN

Return Return

6 REC

Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play

Play

(Play/pause)

backward

backward *2

backward

f Search forward Search forward

Search forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward

Search forward

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause

Pause

(Play/pause)

b Skip backward Skip backward

Skip backward

Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

a Skip forward Skip forward

Skip forward

Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop

7 ENT

Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index

8 MENU

Menu Menu Previous menu

9 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

Notes

87 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this

case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons (

)

on the remote control to select the input area

you want to set up.

2 Press

CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

a similar object.

The

TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the selected input selector button

lights up.

3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (

) to

enter the five-digit remote control code for

the component to be used.

The

TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the remote control code for the

selected component is set.

Refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step

3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the

setup procedure.

• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control

code previously set for the selected input area is cleared.

Setting remote control codes

Input

source

Component

CATEGORY

MEMORY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

ON/OFF

ZONE 2

CONTROL

ZONE

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

OFF

123456789 0

ACDEHBIJF

APPENDIX

■ Remote control

REC

SCENE

1234

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AMP

SOURCE

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

DOCK

CBL

PHONO

MUTE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

4321

SLEEP

MOVIE

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

CLASSICAL

ENT

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENHANCER

NIGHT

SUR. DECODE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

CD CD-R

TUNER XM

V-AU X

DVD

DVR VCR

DTV

4321

MOVIE

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

CLASSICAL

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENHANCER

NIGHT

SUR. DECODE

UVW

QRST

INDEX

110 En

■ Numerics

1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 69

2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 69

2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46

2ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46

3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 70

7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46

7ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46

96/24 indicator ..................................... 27

■ A

A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 81

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ..... 78

A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 72

AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) .......... 24

Action Game, Sound field program ..... 44

Advanced setup .................................... 92

Advanced sound configurations ........... 61

Adventure, Sound field program ......... 45

ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 55

All Channel Search mode,

XM tuning ....................................... 55

All remote control codes resetting ....... 88

AM antenna connection ....................... 24

AM tuning ............................................ 50

Amplifier function OSD display time,

Display settings ............................... 81

Audio cable plugs ................................ 15

Audio components connection ............. 21

AUDIO DELAY, Audio settings ......... 76

Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 76

Audio information ................................ 41

Audio input jacks selection .................. 39

AUDIO jacks ....................................... 15

Audio jacks .......................................... 15

AUDIO SELECT ................................. 39

Audio select, Option menu .................. 82

Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 76

Audio signal flow ................................. 17

AUTO SETUP ............................... 28, 69

Auto setup ............................................ 69

AUTO: RESULT ................................. 31

Automatic preset tuning,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 51

Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 50

Available decoders

with Sound field programs .............. 66

■ B

B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 79

B)MEMORY GUARD,

Option menu .................................... 82

B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu .... 74

Bass cross over, Speaker settings ........ 74

BGV, Multi channel input settings ...... 80

BI-AMP, Advanced setup .................... 95

Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ............. 95

■ C

C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ......82

C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu ..........75

C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .........80

C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............68

Cable plugs ...........................................15

CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................55

CD player connection ...........................21

Cellar Club, Sound field program ........43

CENTER GEQ, Equalizer ....................76

Center graphic equalizer, Equalizer .....76

CENTER PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................22

CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............73

Center speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................66

Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........73

CENTER WIDTH,

Decoder parameter ...........................68

Chamber, Sound field program ............43

Charge on standby,

iPod universal dock setting ..............83

CLASSICAL, Sound field category .....43

CMPNT-V INPUT,

Input/output assignment ...................78

COAXIAL IN,

Input/output assignment ...................79

COAXIAL INPUT jack assignment,

Input/output assignment ...................79

COMPONENT VIDEO jack assignment,

Input/output assignment ...................78

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............15

Compressed Music Enhancer ...............46

Compressed Music Enhancer effect level,

Sound field parameter ......................66

Connection, AM antenna connection ...24

Connection, audio components ............21

Connection, CD player .........................21

Connection,

CENTER PRE OUT jack .................22

Connection, DVD player ......................19

Connection, DVD recorder ..................20

Connection, External amplifier ............22

Connection, external decoder ...............22

Connection, FM antenna ......................24

Connection,

FRONT PRE OUT jacks ..................22

Connection, iPod universal dock .........23

Connection, Multi-format player .........22

Connection, Power cable ......................24

Connection, projector ...........................18

Connection, PVR .................................20

Connection, set-top boxes ....................20

Connection, speaker cable ....................14

Connection,

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ........22

Connection,

SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks ...........22

Connection,

SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ........ 22

Connection, Turntable ......................... 21

Connection, TV monitor ...................... 18

Connection, VCR ................................ 20

CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ......... 74

CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66

Current status display .......................... 39

■ D

D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ..... 80

D)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............ 75

D)PARAM.INI, Option menu ............. 82

Decoder descriptions ........................... 67

Decoder indicators ............................... 26

Decoder mode ...................................... 80

Decoder mode, Input menu ................. 80

Decoder select mode, Decoder mode .. 80

Decoder selection ................................ 66

Decoder type,

Extended surround decoders ........... 77

DIALG.LIFT,

Sound field parameter ..................... 62

Dialogue left,

Sound field parameter ..................... 62

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 15

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 15

DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 68

DIMMER, Display settings ................. 81

Dimmer, Display settings .................... 81

Direct number access mode,

XM tuning ....................................... 55

DIRECT, Sound field parameter ......... 66

DISPLAY SET .................................... 81

Display settings, Option menu ............ 81

DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 30

DISTANCE, Auto setup parameter ..... 30

DOCK indicator .................................. 26

Drama, Sound field program ............... 45

DSP effect level,

Sound field parameter ..................... 62

DSP indicators ..................................... 26

DSP LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ..................... 62

DTS decoder prioritize setting,

Decoder mode ................................. 80

DTS Neo:6 Music ................................ 68

DVD player connection ....................... 19

DVD recorder connection ................... 20

Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 76

■ E

E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 76

E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 80

E)ZONE2 SET, Option menu ............. 82

ENHANCER indicator ........................ 26

ENTERTAINMENT,

Sound field category ....................... 44

EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 75

Index

111 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

EQ TYPE, Auto setup parameter ......... 29

Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 75

Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 75

EQUALIZING,

Auto setup parameter ....................... 30

Extended surround decoders,

Sound menu ..................................... 77

External amplifier connection .............. 22

External decoder connection ................ 22

EXTRA SP ASSIGN,

Auto setup parameter ....................... 29

EXTRA SP ASSIGN,

Speaker settings ............................... 72

Extra speaker assignment,

Auto setup parameter ....................... 29

Extra speaker assignment,

Speaker settings ............................... 72

■ F

F)DYNAMIC RANGE,

Sound menu ..................................... 76

F)XM RADIO SET, Option menu ....... 83

FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 81

FM antenna .......................................... 24

FM antenna connection ........................ 24

FM tuning ............................................ 50

FRONT B speaker setting,

Speaker settings ............................... 72

FRONT B speakers setting .................. 72

FRONT B, Speaker settings ................. 72

Front input,

Multi channel input settings ............ 80

Front panel display ............................... 26

Front panel display scroll,

Display settings ................................ 81

FRONT PRE OUT jack connection ..... 22

FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 73

Front speaker set selection ................... 38

Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 73

FRONT,

Multi channel input settings ............ 80

■ G

G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 76

G)DOCK SET, Option menu ............... 83

■ H

H)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................ 77

Hall in Munich,

Sound field program ........................ 43

Hall in Vienna,

Sound field program ........................ 43

HDMI ................................................... 16

HDMI IN jack assignment,

Input/output assignment .................. 79

HDMI IN, Input/output assignment ..... 79

HDMI indicator .................................... 26

HDMI setting, Sound menu ................. 77

HEADPHONE ..................................... 76

Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 76

HEADPHONE,

Low-frequency effect level .............. 76

Headphone,

Low-frequency effect level .............. 76

Headphones ..........................................40

Headphones indicator ...........................26

HP, Dynamic range ..............................76

■ I

I)EXTD SUR., Sound menu .................77

Infrared window ...................................27

INI VOL., Audio settings .....................77

INI VOL., Zone 2 settings ....................83

INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......63

Initial delay, Sound field parameter .....63

Initial volume, Audio settings ..............77

INPUT CH,

Multi channel input settings .............80

Input channel and speaker indicators ...27

Input channel indicators .......................27

Input channels,

Multi channel input settings .............80

Input menu, Manual setup ....................69

Input rename, Input menu ....................79

Input signal indicators ..........................26

Input source indicators .........................26

Input source information display .........40

Input/output assignment, Input menu ...78

iPod universal dock connection ...........23

iPod universal dock setting ..................83

iPod universal dock setting,

Option menu .....................................83

iPod use ................................................58

■ J

Jacks .....................................................15

■ L

LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............30

LFE indicator .......................................27

LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......74

LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............74

LIVE/CLUB, Sound field category ......43

LIVENESS, Sound field parameter .....64

Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........64

Low-frequency effect level,

Sound menu .....................................76

LVL, Auto setup result .........................30

■ M

Manual preset tuning,

FM/AM tuning .................................51

MANUAL SETUP ...............................69

Manual setup ........................................69

Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............50

MASTER ON/OFF ..............................25

MAX VOL., Audio settings .................77

MAX VOL., Zone 2 settings ................82

Maximum volume ................................77

Maximum volume, Audio settings .......77

Memory guard, Option menu ...............82

MODE,

Extended surround decoders ............77

Mode, Extended surround decoders .....77

Mono Movie, Sound field program ......45

MOVIE, Sound field category .............45

MULTI CH INPUT

component selection .........................38

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 22

Multi channel input settings,

Input menu ....................................... 80

Multi-channel source playback

in 2-channel stereo .......................... 49

Multi-channel source playback

with headphones .............................. 46

Multi-format player connection ........... 22

Multi-information display ................... 27

MULTI-ZONE Configuration ............. 89

MUSIC ENHANCER,

Sound field category ........................ 46

Music Video, Sound field program ..... 44

MUTE .................................................. 40

MUTE indicator ................................... 26

Muting ................................................. 40

MUTING TYPE, Audio settings ......... 76

Muting type, Audio settings ................ 76

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type ........ 66, 67

Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 67

Neural Sur., Decoder type ................... 67

NIGHT indicator ................................. 26

Night listening mode ........................... 49

Number of speakers,

Auto setup result .............................. 30

■ O

Operation mode selector ...................... 27

OPTICAL IN,

Input/output assignment .................. 79

OPTICAL INPUT jack assignment,

Input/output assignment .................. 79

OPTICAL OUT,

Input/output assignment .................. 79

OPTICAL OUTPUT jack assignment,

Input/output assignment .................. 79

OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 28

Option menu, Manual setup ................ 70

OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 81

OSD shift, Display settings ................. 81

OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 81

OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 81

Other components controlling

by remote control ............................ 86

Other components controlling,

Remote control ................................ 86

■ P

P.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 63

P.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 64

PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 68

Parameter initialization,

Option menu .................................... 82

Parametric equalizer information ...... 107

Parametric equalizer type,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 29

Parametric equalizer,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 30

PHONES jack ...................................... 40

PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 67

Index

112 En

PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 67

PL II Music, Decoder type ................... 67

PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ...... 66

Playing video sources

in the background ............................ 40

PLII Movie, Decoder type ................... 66

PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 67

PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 66, 67

PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 67

Power cable connection ....................... 24

PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators ......................................... 27

Presence left speaker level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

Presence right speaker level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

Presence sound field initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 63

Presence sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 64

Presence/Surround back channel priority,

Speaker settings ............................... 72

Preset channel setting, XM tuning ....... 56

Preset SCENE templates ...................... 35

Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 55

PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning .......... 55

Preset station selection,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 52

Preset stations exchange,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 52

PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 93

PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 72

PRO LOGIC II Music .......................... 68

PRO LOGIC IIx Music ........................ 68

PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ........... 66, 67

Projector connection ............................ 18

Pure Direct ........................................... 48

Pure hi-fi sound .................................... 48

PVR connection ................................... 20

■ R

Rear panel ............................................ 11

REMOTE AMP, Advanced setup ........ 93

Remote control AMP ID,

Advanced setup ............................... 93

Remote control code default settings ... 87

Remote control codes .............................. i

Remote control codes setting ............... 87

Remote control TUNER ID,

Advanced setup ............................... 94

Remote control XM ID,

Advanced setup ............................... 94

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 23

REMOTE TUN, Advanced setup ........ 94

REMOTE XM, Advanced setup .......... 94

Rename, SCENE template ................... 36

Repeat .................................................. 59

Repeat, iPod playback .......................... 59

Resetting the system .......................... 103

REV.DELAY,

Sound field parameter ...................... 65

REV.LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ...................... 65

REV.TIME,

Sound field parameter ......................65

Reverberation delay,

Sound field parameter ......................65

Reverberation level,

Sound field parameter ......................65

Reverberation time,

Sound field parameter ......................65

Roleplaying Game,

Sound field program ........................44

ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ......................64

Room size, Sound field parameter .......64

■ S

S VIDEO jacks .....................................15

S.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ......................63

S.LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ......................64

S.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ......................64

SB INI.DLY,

Sound field parameter ......................63

SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ................73

SB LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ......................66

SB LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ......................64

SB ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ......................64

SCENE 1 ................................................9

SCENE 2 ................................................9

SCENE 3 ................................................9

SCENE 4 ................................................9

SCENE IR code setting,

Advanced setup ................................95

SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................95

SCENE template rename .....................36

Sci-Fi, Sound field program .................45

Selection, Audio input jacks ................39

Selection, Front speaker set .................38

Selection,

MULTI CH INPUT component .......38

Selection, SCENE template .................33

SET MENU usage ................................71

Set-top box connection .........................20

Shuffle, iPod playback .........................59

SILENT CINEMA ...............................46

SILENT CINEMA indicator ................26

SIZE, Auto setup parameter .................30

SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......66

SLEEP indicator ...................................27

Sleep timer ...........................................41

Sound field indicators ..........................26

Sound field programs ...........................42

Sound field programs

with headphones ..............................46

Sound field programs

without surround speakers ...............46

SOUND MENU, Manual setup ...........72

Sound menu, Manual setup ..................69

Source feature OSD display time,

Display settings ................................81

SP A B indicators ................................ 26

SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 93

SP, Auto setup result ........................... 30

SP, Dynamic range .............................. 76

Speaker cable connection .................... 14

Speaker distance,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 30

Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 30

Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 75

Speaker distances ................................ 75

Speaker impedance setting .................. 25

Speaker impedance,

Advanced setup ............................... 93

Speaker level adjustment ..................... 48

Speaker level,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 30

Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 30

Speaker level, Sound menu ................. 74

Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 72

Speaker size, Auto setup parameter .... 30

Speaker wiring,

Auto setup parameter ...................... 30

Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 76

SPEAKER,

Low-frequency effect level ............. 76

Speaker, Low-frequency effect level ... 76

Specifications .................................... 108

Spectacle, Sound field program ........... 45

Sports, Sound field program ................ 44

SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66

Standard, Sound field program ............ 45

STANDBY CHARGE,

iPod universal dock setting ............. 83

Standby mode, Main zone ................... 25

Standby mode, Zone 2 ......................... 91

STEREO, Sound field category ........... 46

STRAIGHT ......................................... 47

STRAIGHT mode ............................... 47

SUBWOOFER PHASE,

Speaker settings ............................... 74

Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ..... 74

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

connection ....................................... 22

Supplied accessories .............................. 3

SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setting ..... 77

Support audio, HDMI setting .............. 77

SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ........... 73

SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack

connection ....................................... 22

Surround back left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 73

Surround back sound field initial delay,

Sound field parameter ..................... 63

Surround back sound field liveness,

Sound field parameter ..................... 64

Surround back sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ..................... 64

Surround back speaker level,

Sound field parameter ..................... 66

Surround decode mode ........................ 66

SURROUND DECODE,

Decoder category ............................ 67

Surround left speaker level,

Sound field parameter ..................... 66

Index

113 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Surround left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ............................... 73

SURROUND PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................ 22

Surround right speaker level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 66

Surround sound field initial delay,

Sound field parameter ...................... 63

Surround sound field liveness,

Sound field parameter ...................... 64

Surround sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ...................... 64

■ T

Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 75

TEST, Equalizer ................................... 75

The Bottom Line,

Sound field program ........................ 43

The Roxy Theatre,

Sound field program ........................ 43

Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 48

TRANSMIT indicator .......................... 27

Troubleshooting ................................... 96

TU, Advanced setup ............................ 95

Tuner frequency step,

Advanced setup ................................ 95

Tuner indicators ...................................26

Turning off ...........................................25

Turning on ............................................25

Turntable connection ............................21

TV Controlling, remote control ............85

TV monitor connection ........................18

TYPE,

Extended surround decoders ............77

■ U

UNIT, Speaker distance .......................75

Unit, Speaker distance ..........................75

Unprocessed input sources ...................47

User presets, Advanced setup ..............93

■ V

VCR connection ...................................20

VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................23

VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........81

Video conversion, Display settings ......81

Video information ................................41

VIDEO jacks ........................................15

Video jacks ...........................................15

Video signal flow .................................17

Video sources in the background .........40

Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................46

VIRTUAL indicator .............................26

VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................4

Volume level ........................................30

VOLUME level indicator .....................26

Volume Trim, Input menu ....................80

■ W

WIRING, Auto setup parameter .......... 30

■ X

XM ANTENNA, XM Radio setting .... 83

XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................... 53

XM Radio antenna,

XM Radio setting ............................ 83

XM Radio setting, Option menu ......... 83

XM satellite radio activation ............... 54

XM Satellite Radio display ................. 57

XM satellite radio tuning ..................... 53

■ Y

YPAO indicator ................................... 26

■ Z

Zone 2 .................................................. 89

Zone 2 Initial volume,

Zone 2 settings ................................ 83

Zone 2 Maximum volume,

Zone 2 settings ................................ 82

Zone 2 settings, Option menu .............. 82

Zone B ................................................. 38

ZONE2 indicator ................................. 26

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the

button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in

parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,

etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts.

•

The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s).

iii

List of remote control codes

CABLE TV RECEIVER

3M 10033

A-MARK 10008, 10144

ABC 10237, 10003,

10008, 10033

ACCUPHASE 10003

ACORN 10237

ACTION 10237

ACTIVE 10237

AMERICAST 10899

ARCHER 10237

BCC 10276

BELL SOUTH 10899

BRITISH TELECOM

10003

CENTURY 10008

DIRECTOR 10476

DX ANTENNA 11500

FOSGATE 10276

FUJITSU 11497

GE 10144

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10476, 10810,

10276, 10003

GIBRALTER 10003

GOLDSTAR 10144

HITACHI 10003, 10008,

10033

INSIGHT 10476, 10810

JERROLD 10476, 10810,

10276, 10003

MACOM 10033

MEMOREX 10000

MITSUBISHI 10003

MOTOROLA 11376, 10476,

10810, 10276

NEC 11496

NOVA VISION 10008

NOVAPLEX 10008

PACE 11877, 10877,

10237, 10008

PANASONIC 10000, 10008,

10144, 10107,

10375, 11488

PARAGON 10000, 10008,

10525

PENNEY 10000

PHILIPS 11305, 10317

PIONEER 11877, 10877,

10144, 10533,

11021, 11500,

11782

PULSAR 10000

QUASAR 10000

REGAL 10276

RUNCO 10000

SAMSUNG 10003, 10144

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

11877, 10877,

10477, 10237,

10003, 10000,

10008

SONY 11006, 11460

SPRUCER 10144

STARCOM 10003

SUMITOMO 11500, 11503

SUPERCABLE 10276

TORX 10003

TOSHIBA 10000, 11509

UNITED CABLE

10276, 10003

US ELECTRONICS

10276, 10003,

10008

VIDEOWAY 10000

ZENITH 10000, 10525,

10899

CABLE/PVR

COMBINATION

AMERICAST 10899

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10810

JERROLD 10810

MOTOROLA 11376, 10810

PACE 11877, 10237

PIONEER 11877, 10877

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

11877, 10877

SONY 11006

SUPERCABLE 10276

ZENITH 10899

DBS/PVR

COMBINATION

DIRECTV 11377, 10392,

10639, 11142,

11392, 11442,

11640

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

11505, 10775

DISHPRO 11505, 10775

ECHOSTAR 11505, 10775

EXPRESSVU 10775

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

11142, 11442

PHILIPS 11142, 11442

PROSCAN 10392

RCA 11392

SAMSUNG 11442

SHARP 11489

SONY 10639, 11640

SATELLITE RECEIVER

AIWA 11514, 11515

ALPHASTAR 10772

AUSTAR 10879

BELL EXPRESSVU

10775

CHAPARRAL 10216

DIRECTV 11377, 10392,

10566, 10639,

11639, 11142,

10247, 10749,

11749, 10724,

10819, 11856,

11392, 11442,

11640

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

11505, 11005,

10775, 11775

DISHPRO 11505, 11005,

10775, 11775

DX ANTENNA 11530

ECHOSTAR 11505, 11005,

10775, 11775

ESAT 10879

EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775

FOXTEL 10879, 11356

FUNAI 11377

GE 10392, 10566

GOI 10775, 11775

HITACHI 10749, 10819,

10214, 11250,

11518, 11523,

11525

HOUSTON 10775

HTS 10775, 11775

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

11142, 10749,

11749, 11442

JVC 10775, 10492,

11507, 11531,

11532, 11775

LG 11226

MAGNAVOX 10724, 10722

MASPRO 11520, 11530

MATSUSHITA 10214

MEMOREX 10724

MITSUBISHI 10749

MOTOROLA 10856

NEC 10496, 11270,

11519

OPTIMUS 10724

PACE 11356

PANASAT 10879

PANASONIC 10247, 10701,

10214, 11508,

11526, 11527,

11528

PAYSAT 10724

PHILIPS 11142, 10749,

11749, 10775,

10724, 10819,

10722, 11442

PIONEER 11142, 11442

PROSCAN 10392, 10566

RADIOSHACK 10566, 10775

RCA 10392, 10566,

11142, 10775,

10855, 10143,

11392, 11442

SAMSUNG 11377, 11142,

11276, 11442

SANYO 11219

SHARP 10494, 11489,

11513, 11517

SKY 10856

SONY 10639, 11639,

10163, 10275,

10294, 11524,

11640

STAR TRAK 10772

THOMSON 10392, 10566

TIVO 11142, 11442

TOSHIBA 10749, 11749,

10790, 10819,

10486, 11285,

11501, 11516,

11530

UEC 11356

ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640

UNIDEN 10724, 10722

ZENITH 10856, 11856

A-MARK 20047, 20054,

20160

ACCUSCAN 20047

ACTION 20030

ADMIRAL 20017, 20047,

20051, 20054,

20093, 20179,

20180, 20264,

20463

ADVENT 20761, 20783,

20815, 20817,

20842

ADVENTURI 20000

AGNA 20150

AIKO 20092

AIWA 21180

AKAI 20030, 20060,

20145, 20672,

20702, 20812

ALARON 20170, 20179

ALBA 20037

ALBATRON 20700, 20843

ALFIDE 20672

ALLERON 20030, 20170

AMBASSADOR

20150

AMERICA ACTION

20180

AMERICAN HIGH

20000, 20060

AMSTRAD 20171

AMTRON 20000, 20180

ANAM 20180

ANAM NATIONAL

20161

AOC 20030, 20180

APEX DIGITAL20156, 20748,

20765, 20767,

20879

AUDINAC 20180

AUDIOVOX 20092, 20179,

20180, 20451,

20623, 20802,

20875

AVENTURA 20171

BAYCREST 20186

BAYSONIC 20180

BEAUMARK 20017, 20030,

20178, 20179

BELCOR 20030

BELL & HOWELL

20054, 20093,

20154, 20179

BENQ 21032

BRADFORD 20180

BROCKWOOD 20030, 20178

BROKSONIC 20180, 20236,

20463

BROTHER 20264

BYD:SIGN 21309, 21311,

21485, 21486

CANDLE 20030, 20186

CAPEHART 20017, 20030,

20036, 20092,

20178

CARNIVALE 20030

APPENDIX

CARVER 20054, 20170

CCE 20037

CELEBRITY 20000

CELERA 20765

CHANGHONG 20156, 20765,

20767, 20783

CINERAL 20092, 20451

CITEK 20047

CITIZEN 20000, 20030,

20054, 20060,

20092, 20171,

20180, 20186,

20451, 20463

CLARION 20180

CLASSIC 20030, 20092

COLORTYME 20017, 20030,

20047, 20054,

20060, 20178

COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS

20047, 21447

CONIC 20178

CONTEC 20180

CRAIG 20161, 20171,

20179, 20180

CROSLEY 20000, 20030,

20054, 20171,

20180

CROWN 20093, 20180,

20672

CROWN MUSTANG

20672

CURTIS MATHES

21347, 21147,

20702, 20451,

20180, 20179,

20178, 20166,

20154, 20145,

20093, 20060,

20054, 20051,

20047, 20037,

20030, 20000

CXC 20180

DAEWOO 20036, 20092,

20178, 20264,

20451, 20623,

20661, 20672,

21661, 21755,

21756

DAYTON 20092

DAYTRON 20030, 20036,

20092, 20178

DELL 21178

DENON 20145, 20511

DUMONT 20017, 20178,

20180

DURABRAND 20171, 20178,

20180, 20463,

21034

DWIN 20093

EATON 20060

ELECTROBAND

20000

ELECTROGRAPH

21755

ELECTROHOME

20000, 20030,

20150, 20154,

20178

EMERALD 20178

EMERSON 20036, 20047,

20150, 20154,

20170, 20171,

20178, 20179,

20180, 20236,

20451, 20463,

20623

ENVISION 20030

ESA 20171, 20812

FISHER 20000, 20054,

20154

FORTRESS 20093

FUJITSU 20179, 20186,

20683, 20809,

20853, 21181,

21607

FUJITSU GENERAL

20186

FUNAI 20000, 20171,

20179, 20180,

20264, 20342

FUTURETECH

20180

GATEWAY 21755, 21756

GE 20000, 20030,

20047, 20051,

20060, 20178,

20451, 21147,

21347, 21447

GEMINI 20047

GENERAL 20186

GIBRALTER 20000, 20017,

20030

GOLDSTAR 20030, 20036,

20037, 20047,

20054, 20178,

21378

GOODMANS 20037

GPX 20179

GRADIENTE 20053, 20170

GRAN PRIX 20179

GRANADA 20037

GRUNDIG 20037, 20672,

20683, 20706

GRUNDY 20179, 20180

GRUNPY 20179, 20180

HAIER 21034

HALLMARK 20178, 20179,

20180, 20236

HARLEY DAVIDSON

20000, 20030,

20060, 20178,

20179, 20180

HARMAN/KARDON

20054

HARVARD 20180

HAVERMY 20093

HEATHKIT 20017

HELIOS 20865

HELLO KITTY 20451

HISENSE 20748

HITACHI 20000, 20017,

20036, 20047,

20051, 20054,

20145, 20178,

20179, 21145,

21150, 21245,

21378

HYUNDAI 20849, 20865

ICE 20264

IMA 20178, 20179,

20180, 20236

INFINITY 20054

INNOVA 20037

INSIGNIA 20171

INTEQ 20017, 20145

JBL 20054

JCB 20000

JENSEN 20761, 20815,

20817

JIL 20030

JINXING 20037

JUTAN 20030

JVC 20030, 20036,

20053, 20054,

20160, 20653,

20731, 21172,

21253, 21428

KAMP 20017, 20180

KAWASHO 20030

KEC 20060, 20180

KENWOOD 20030, 20180

KLH 20156, 20180,

20765, 20767

KLOSS 20030

KONKA 20180

KTV 20030, 20180,

20463

LARK 20154

LG 20030, 20054,

20060, 20178,

20442, 20700,

20856, 21178,

21265, 21378

LLOYD'S 20030, 20179,

20180, 20236

LOGIK 20179, 20180,

20236

LUMATRON 20037, 20264

LXI 20179, 20178,

20171, 20166,

20156, 20154,

20093, 20060,

20054, 20053,

20051, 20047,

20037, 20036,

20030, 20017,

20000

MACY 20186

MAGNASONIC

20000, 20030,

20054, 20092,

20093, 20156,

20179

MAGNAVOX 21755, 21454,

21254, 20802,

20706, 20250,

20186, 20180,

20179, 20171,

20154, 20092,

20060, 20054,

20051, 20047,

20037, 20036,

20030, 20000

MAJESTIC 20017

MARANTZ 20030, 20037,

20054, 20704,

21454

MARK 20037

MATSUI 20036, 20037

MATSUSHITA 20051, 20161,

20250, 20650

MAXENT 21755, 21756

MEGAPOWER 20700

MEGATRON 20047, 20145,

20178

MEMOREX 20030, 20037,

20150, 20154,

20178, 20179,

20180, 20463

MERMAID 20037

MGA 20030, 20150,

20178

MGN TECHNOLOGY

20178

MICRO GENIUS

20150

MIDLAND 20017, 20047,

20051

MINATO 20037

MITSUBISHI 20030, 20036,

20093, 20150,

20154, 20160,

20178, 20250,

20836, 21150,

21171, 21182,

21250, 21522

MONIVISION 20700, 20843

MOTOROLA 20051, 20054,

20093, 20150

MTC 20030, 20060,

20092, 20180

MULTITECH 20179, 20180

NAD 20156, 20166,

20178, 20866

NEC 20030, 20036,

20047, 20156,

20170, 20178,

20474, 20704,

21182, 21456,

21704

NETTV 21755

NIKKO 20030, 20092,

20178

NIKKODO 20030, 20092,

20178

NISHI 20030

NORCENT 20748, 20824

NTC 20092

NYON 20000

ONWA 20180

OPTIMUS 20030, 20093,

20150, 20154,

20166, 20178,

20180, 20250,

20650

OPTONICA 20093

ORION 20017, 20178,

20179, 20180,

20236, 20463,

21463

PACE 20092

PACIFIC 20037

PALSONIC 20264

PANASONIC 20000, 20030,

20051, 20054,

20156, 20161,

20236, 20250,

20650, 21168,

21175, 21177

PANDA 20706

PAUSA 20179

PAXONIC 20030, 20060

PCE 20060, 20156,

20179

PENNEY 20000, 20030,

20036, 20037,

20047, 20051,

20060, 20156,

20161, 20178,

20250, 21347,

21378

PHILCO 20030, 20054,

20145, 20179,

20186, 20463

PHILIPS 20030, 20037,

20054, 20171,

20186, 20690,

21254, 21454,

21455

PILOT 20030, 20051,

20060, 20178

PIONEER 20166, 20679,

20866, 21260

POLAROID 20765, 20865

PORTLAND 20092, 20451

PRECISION 20180, 20236

PRIMA 20761, 20783,

20815, 20817

PRINCETON 20700

PRISM 20051, 20250

PROSCAN 20047, 21347,

21447

PROTEC 20037, 20264

PROTON 20178

PROVISION 20037

PULSAR 20017, 20092

PULSER 20092, 20178

QUARTZ 20150, 20178

QUASAR 20051, 20250,

20650

R-LINE 20037

RABBIT 20047

RADIOSHACK 20030, 20047,

20150, 20154,

20178, 20180

RCA 20000, 20047,

20051, 20054,

20090, 20093,

20178, 20679,

21047, 21147,

21247, 21347,

21447, 21547

REALISTIC 20030, 20047,

20150, 20154,

20178, 20180

REVOX 20037

RUNCO 20017, 20030,

20060

SAMPO 20030, 20047,

21755, 21756

SAMSUNG 20017, 20030,

20036, 20037,

20047, 20054,

20060, 20154,

20178, 20264,

20587, 20702,

20766, 20812,

20814, 21060

SANKY 20030, 20060

SANSUI 20030, 20060,

20463

SANYO 20000, 20036,

20037, 20047,

20054, 20088,

20154, 20171,

20376, 20424,

20463, 21179,

21755

SAVILLE 20060

SCOTCH 20178

SCOTT 20030, 20178,

20179, 20180,

20236

SEARS 20179, 20178,

20171, 20166,

20156, 20154,

20093, 20060,

20054, 20053,

20051, 20047,

20037, 20036,

20030, 20017,

20000

SHARP 20036, 20054,

20093, 20179,

20180, 20256,

20787, 21165

SHENG CHIA 20093

SHIVAKI 20037, 20178

SIEMENS 20145

SIGNATURE 20030, 20047,

20093, 20179

SIMPSON 20030, 20178,

20186

SINGER 20060, 20092

SKY-NORTH 20037

SOLAR DRAPE

20000

SONY 20000, 20017,

20036, 20053,

20150, 20154,

21100, 21167,

21300, 21651

SOUNDESIGN

20178, 20179,

20180, 20186

SPECTRAVISION

20156, 20178,

20179, 20186

SQUAREVIEW

20171

SR2000 20154, 20171

SSS 20180

STARLITE 20180, 20236

STUDIO EXPERIENCE

20843

SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864

SUPRE-MACY 20186

SUPREME 20000

SV2000 20054

SVA 20587, 20748,

20865, 20870,

20871

SYLVANIA 20000, 20030,

20036, 20037,

20047, 20051,

20054, 20092,

20154, 20171,

20178, 20179,

20186

SYMPHONIC 20000, 20171,

20178, 20179,

20180

TANDY 20093

TATUNG 20000, 20037,

20051, 21756

TEAC 20037, 20154,

20264, 20706

TECHNICS 20051, 20054,

20250

TECHNOL ACE

20179

TECHNOVOX 20030

TECHWOOD 20051, 20060,

20250

TEKNIKA 20054, 20060,

20092, 20150,

20178, 20179,

20180, 20186,

20463

TELECOLOR 20017

TELEFUNKEN

20702

TELETON 20186

TEVION 20037

THOMAS 20047, 20178

THOMSON 20047, 21447

TMK 20178, 20180,

20236

TNCI 20017

TOCOM 20156

TOSHIBA 21704, 21656,

21456, 21356,

21265, 21256,

21173, 21169,

21156, 21145,

20845, 20650,

20509, 20264,

20166, 20156,

20154, 20150,

20145, 20060,

20036

TOTEVISION 20051

TOYOMENKA 20178

TRUETONE 20051, 20250

TVS 20463

ULTRA 20092

UNIVERSAL 20047

UNIVERSUM 20036, 20037,

20170, 20264,

20474

V 20864, 20885,

21755, 21756

VECTOR RESEARCH

20030

VICTOR 20036, 20053,

20160, 20653

VIDIKRON 20054

VIDTECH 20036, 20178

VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864,

20885, 21755

VIKING 20060

VISIO 20864, 20885,

21755, 21756

VIZIO 20864, 20885,

21756

WARDS 20000, 20017,

20030, 20037,

20047, 20051,

20054, 20093,

20154, 20166,

20178, 20179,

20186, 20236,

20866, 21156

WAYCON 20156

WELTON 20178

WESTINGHOUSE

20000, 20451,

20885, 20889

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

20179, 20236,

20451, 20463,

20623, 20889

WORLD 20180, 20236,

20451, 20463

XR-1000 20154, 20171,

20179, 20180

YAMAHA 20030, 20650,

20769, 21405,

21406, 21407,

21522

YORX 20030

ZENITH 20000, 20017,

20030, 20037,

20047, 20092,

20093, 20145,

20160, 20171,

20178, 20463,

20812, 21145,

21265

PVR

ABS 31972

ALIENWARE 31972

CYBERPOWER

31972

DELL 31972

DIRECTV 30739

GATEWAY 31972

HEWLETT PACKARD

31972

HITACHI 31718

HOWARD COMPUTERS

31972

HP 31972

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

30739

HUMAX 30739

HUSH 31972

IBUYPOWER 31972

JVC 31279

LINKSYS 31972

MEDIA CENTER PC

31972

MICROSOFT 31972

MIND 31972

MITSUBISHI 31714

NIVEUS MEDIA

31972

NORTHGATE 31972

PANASONIC 30616, 31244,

31732, 31807,

31808, 31809

PHILIPS 30618, 30739

PIONEER 31803

RCA 30880

REPLAYTV 30614, 30616

SAMSUNG 30739

SHARP 31742, 31810

SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616

SONY 30636, 31447,

31448, 31636,

31972

STACK 9 31972

SYSTEMAX 31972

TAGAR SYSTEMS

31972

TIVO 30618, 30636,

30739

TOSHIBA 30828, 31008,

31739, 31972,

31996

TOUCH 31972

VICTOR 31706

VIEWSONIC 31972

VOODOO 31972

ZT GROUP 31972

APPENDIX

VCR

A-MARK 30037, 30240,

30000

ABS 31972

ADMIRAL 30060, 30048,

30039, 30047,

30104, 30209

ADVENTURA 30037, 30240,

30000

AIWA 30037, 30000,

30307, 30348,

31284, 31291,

31332, 31336

AKAI 30041

ALBA 30209

ALIENWARE 31972

ALLEGRO 30039

AMERICAN HIGH

30035, 30081

AMSTRAD 30000

ANAM NATIONAL

30226

ASHA 30240

ASTRA 30035, 30240

AUDIOVOX 30037, 30038

AVIS 30000

BEAUMARK 30240

BELL & HOWELL

30035, 30048,

30039, 30000,

30104

BROKSONIC 30184, 30121,

30209, 30348,

31479

CALIX 30037

CANDLE 30037, 30038

CANON 30035, 30034

CARRERA 30240

CARVER 30035, 30081

CITIZEN 30035, 30037,

30240, 30000,

30209, 31278

CLASSIC 30037

COLORTYME 30060, 30035,

30045

COLT 30000

CRAIG 30037, 30047,

30240

CRITERION 30000

CROSLEY 30035, 30081,

30000

CURTIS MATHES

30060, 30035,

30162, 30240,

30000, 30041,

31035

CYBERNEX 30240

CYBERPOWER

31972

DAEWOO 30037, 30045,

31278

DAYTRON 30037

DELL 31972

DENON 30081, 30042

DERWENT 30041

DIRECTV 30739

DUAL 30000

DURABRAND 30039, 30038

DYNATECH 30240, 30000

ELECTROHOME

30060, 30037,

30240, 30000,

30043, 30209

ELECTROPHONIC

30037

EMERALD 30184, 30121

EMEREX 30032

EMERSON 30037, 30184,

30240, 30000,

30121, 30043,

30209, 30348,

31278, 31479

FISHER 30039, 30047,

30000, 30104

FUJI 30035, 30033

FUJITSU 30045, 30000

FUNAI 30037, 30000,

31333

GARRARD 30000

GATEWAY 31972

GE 30060, 30035,

30048, 30240,

30000, 30807,

31035, 31060

GEMINI 30060

GENERAL 30045

GENEXXA 30037, 30000

GO VIDEO 30240, 30614

GOLDSTAR 30035, 30037,

30039, 30000,

30038, 31237

GOODMANS 30037, 30081,

30000

GRADIENTE 30000

GRANADA 30081, 30042

GRUNDIG 30081, 30034,

30226

HARLEY DAVIDSON

30000

HARMAN/KARDON

30081, 30038

HEWLETT PACKARD

31972

HI-Q 30035, 30047,

30000

HITACHI 30035, 30037,

30045, 30000,

30042, 30041,

30166, 31286,

31326, 31718

HOWARD COMPUTERS

31972

HP 31972

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

30042, 30739

HUMAX 30739

HUSH 31972

HYTEK 30047, 30000

IBUYPOWER 31972

ITT NOKIA 30240, 30041

JANEIL 30240

JENSEN 30067, 30041

JVC 30067, 30041,

31279, 31299,

31329

KEC 30037

KENWOOD 30067, 30041,

30038

KODAK 30035, 30037

KTV 30000

LG 30037, 30240,

30038

LIFETEC 30348

LINKSYS 31972

LLOYD'S 30240, 30000,

30038

LOEWE 30081

LOGIK 30240, 30000

LXI 30037, 30000,

30042, 30067

M ELECTRONIC

30240

MAGNASONIC

30037, 30240,

30000, 31278

MAGNAVOX 30035, 30037,

30048, 30039,

30081, 30240,

30000, 30226,

30618, 31781

MAGNIN 30240

MARANTZ 30035, 30081,

30038, 31381

MARTA 30037

MATSUI 30037, 30209,

30348

MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162,

30081, 30226

MEDIA CENTER PC

31972

MEDION 30348

MEI 30035

MEMOREX 30035, 30162,

30037, 30048,

30039, 30047,

30240, 30000,

30104, 30209,

30307, 30348,

31237

METZ 30037

MGA 30060, 30240,

30043

MGN TECHNOLOGY

30240

MICROSOFT 31972

MIDLAND 30240

MIND 31972

MINOLTA 30042

MITSUBISHI 30060, 30048,

30047, 30000,

30042, 30067,

30043, 30041,

30807, 31343,

31714

MOTOROLA 30035, 30048

MTC 30240, 30000

MTX 30000

MULTITECH 30039, 30000

NAD 30240, 30104

NEC 30104, 30067,

30041, 30038

NIKKO 30037

NIKKODO 30037

NIKON 30034

NISHI 30240

NIVEUS MEDIA

31972

NOBLEX 30240

NORTHGATE 31972

OLYMPUS 30035, 30162,

30104, 30226

OPTIMUS 31062, 30035,

30162, 30037,

30048, 30047,

30240, 30000,

30104

ORION 30184, 30240,

30000, 30104,

30121, 30209,

31479

PANAMA 30035

PANASONIC 31062, 30035,

30162, 30000,

30225, 30226,

30614, 30616,

31035, 31244,

31292, 31308,

31732, 31807,

31808, 31809

PENNEY 30035, 30162,

30037, 30047,

30081, 30240,

30000, 30042,

30067, 30038,

31035, 31237

PENTAX 30042

PHILCO 30035, 30081,

30000, 30209

PHILIPS 30035, 30162,

30048, 30081,

30045, 30000,

30209, 30034,

30616, 30618,

30739, 31381

PILOT 30037

PIONEER 30162, 30081,

30042, 30067,

31803

POLK AUDIO 30081

PROFITRONIC

30240

PROSCAN 30060, 31060

PROTEC 30000

PULSAR 30039, 30240

PULSER 30240

QUARTZ 30035, 30047

QUASAR 30035, 30162,

30226, 31035

RADIOSHACK

30035, 30162,

30037, 30048,

30047, 30240,

30000, 30104

RADIX 30037

RANDEX 30037

RCA 30060, 30035,

30048, 30240,

30045, 30000,

30042, 30166,

30807, 30880,

31035, 31060

REALISTIC 30035, 30162,

30037, 30048,

30047, 30240,

30000, 30104,

30121

REPLAYTV 30614, 30616

RICAVISION 31972

RICOH 30034

RUNCO 30039

SAMSUNG 30060, 30240,

30045, 30000,

30038, 30739,

31014

SAMTRON 30240

SANKY 30048, 30039

SANSUI 30240, 30000,

30067, 30209,

30041, 31479

SANYO 30047, 30240,

30000, 30104,

31330, 31331

SCOTT 30184, 30045,

30121, 30043

vii

SEARS 30060, 30035,

30162, 30037,

30048, 30039,

30047, 30033,

30045, 30000,

30042, 30104,

30067, 30043,

30209, 30041,

30034, 31237

SHARP 30048, 30047,

30032, 30000,

30807, 31285,

31742, 31810

SHINTOM 30039, 30240,

30000

SHOGUN 30240

SIEMENS 30037, 30104

SIGNATURE 30060, 30035,

30037, 30048,

30000

SINGER 30037, 30240

SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616

SONY 30035, 30047,

30032, 30033,

30000, 30067,

30034, 30226,

30636, 31232,

31295, 31296,

31447, 31448,

31636, 31972

SOUNDMASTER

30000

STACK 9 31972

STS 30042

SV2000 30000

SVA 30000

SYLVANIA 30035, 30081,

30000, 30043,

31781

SYMPHONIC 30240, 30000

SYSTEMAX 31972

TAGAR SYSTEMS

31972

TANDY 30000, 30104

TATUNG 30048, 30081,

30000, 30067,

30041

TEAC 30000, 30067,

30041

TECHNICS 30035, 30162,

30037, 30000

TEKNIKA 30035, 30037,

30000

TELECORDER 30240

TELEFUNKEN 30041

THOMAS 30000

THOMSON 30060, 30041

TIVO 30618, 30636,

30739, 31996

TMK 30240, 30000

TNIX 30037

TOCOM 30240

TOSHIBA 30240, 30045,

30000, 30042,

30043, 30209,

30041, 30828,

30845, 31008,

31145, 31323,

31739, 31972,

31996

TOTEVISION 30037, 30240

TOUCH 31972

TRIX 30037

ULTRA 30045

UNITECH 30240

VECTOR 30045

VECTOR RESEARCH

30184, 30038

VICTOR 30067, 30041,

31299, 31706

VIDEO CONCEPTS

30045

VIDEOMAGIC 30037

VIDEOSONIC 30240, 30000

VIEWSONIC 31972

VILLAIN 30000

VOODOO 31972

WARDS 30060, 30035,

30037, 30048,

30047, 30081,

30033, 30240,

30045, 30000,

30042, 30043,

30041, 30038

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

30000, 30209

WORLD 30209

XR-1000 30035, 30240,

30000

YAMAHA 30041, 30038

ZENITH 30037, 30039,

30033, 30000,

30209, 30041,

30034, 31479

ZT GROUP 31972

DVD PLAYER

3D LAB 40503, 40539

ACCURIAN 41416

ADVENT 41016

AIWA 40641

AKAI 40695, 40705,

40770, 40899

ALBA 40672, 40717

ALCO 40790

ALLEGRO 40869

AMPHION MEDIA WORKS

40872

AMW 40872

APEX DIGITAL

40533, 40672,

40717, 40755,

40794, 40796,

40797, 40830,

41004, 41020,

41056, 41061,

41100

ARRGO 41023

ASPIRE DIGITAL

41168

AUDIOVOX 40717, 40790

BEL CANTO DESIGN

41571

BLAUPUNKT 40717

BLUE PARADE40571

BLUE SKY 40695

BRANDT 40651

BROKSONIC 40695

BYD:SIGN 40872

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

40490

CELESTIAL 41020

CENTREX 40672, 41004

CINEA 40831

CINEVISION 40876, 40869

CITIZEN 41003, 41277

CLAIRTONE 40571

COBY 40778, 41086,

41107

CRAIG 40831

CREATIVE 40503, 40539

CURTIS MATHES

41087

CYBERHOME 40816, 40874,

41023, 41024,

41117, 41129

CYTRON 40705

DAEWOO 40784, 40705,

40770, 40869,

41169, 41172

DANSAI 40770

DAYTEK 40872

DECCA 40770

DENON 40490, 40634,

41282, 41634

DENVER 40778

DIGITREX 40672

DISNEY 40675, 41270

DIVIDO 40705

DUAL 40675

DURABRAND 41127

DVD2000 40521

ELECTROHOME

41003

EMERSON 40591, 40675,

40821, 41268

ENTERPRISE 40591

ENTIVO 40503, 40539

ENZER 40770

ESA 40821, 41268

FIRSTLINE 40651

FISHER 40670

FUNAI 40675, 41268

GATEWAY 41158

GE 40522, 40815,

40717

GO VIDEO 40573, 40744,

40717, 40741,

40783, 40869,

41044, 41075,

41099, 41158,

41304, 41730

GOLDSTAR 40741, 40801,

40869

GOODMANS 40790

GRADIENTE 40490, 40651

GREENHILL 40717

GRUNDIG 40539, 40705

HARMAN/KARDON

40582, 40702

HITACHI 40573, 40664,

41247, 41664,

41764

HITEKER 40672

I-O DATA 41405

ILO 41348

INITIAL 40717

INSIGNIA 41268

INTEGRA 40571, 40627,

41634

IRT 40783

JBL 40702

JENSEN 41016

JMB 40695

JVC 40558, 40623,

40867, 41164,

41241, 41275,

41590, 41592,

41594

KAWASAKI 40790

KENWOOD 40490, 40534

KLH 40717, 40790,

41020, 41149

KLOSS 40533

KOSS 40651, 41061

LASONIC 40627, 40798

LECSON 41533

LENOXX 41127

LG 40591, 40741,

40801, 40869,

41600

LITEON 41058, 41158,

41416, 41440

LOEWE 40741

LOGIX 40783

MAGNASONIC

40651, 40675

MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,

40646, 40675,

40821, 41268

MARANTZ 40503, 40539,

40675, 41627

MCINTOSH 41533

MEDION 40651

MEMOREX 40695, 40831,

41270

MICROSOFT 40522, 41708

MINATO 40752

MINTEK 40839, 40717

MITSUBISHI 41521, 40521,

41403, 41629

NAD 40591, 40741

NAIKO 40770

NEC 40785, 40869,

41404

NESA 40717

NEXXTECH 41402

NORCENT 41003, 40872,

41107

ONKYO 40503, 40627,

40792, 41612,

41627

OPTIMUS 40571

ORION 41695

ORITRON 40651

PALSONIC 40672

PANASONIC 40503, 40490,

40571, 40703,

41010, 41011,

41282, 41362,

41462, 41490,

41632, 41641,

41762

PHILIPS 40503, 40539,

40646, 40675,

40854, 41260,

41267, 41354

PIANODISC 41024

PIONEER 40525, 40571,

40631, 40638,

41475, 41476,

41571

POLAROID 41020, 41061,

41086

POLK AUDIO 40539

PORTLAND 40770

PRESIDIAN 40675

PRIMA 41016

PROCEED 40672

PROSCAN 40522

PROVISION 40778

QWESTAR 40651

RADIONETTE 40741

RADIOSHACK

40571

RCA 40522, 40571,

40717, 40790,

40822, 41022,

41132

viii

APPENDIX

REALISTIC 40571

REOC 40752

RIO 40869

ROTEL 40623

ROWA 41004

SABA 40651

SAMPO 40752

SAMSUNG 40490, 40573,

40744, 40820,

40899, 41044,

41075, 41599

SANSUI 40695, 41695

SANYO 40670, 40675,

40695, 41583

SCHNEIDER 40783

SCHWAIGER 40752

SENSORY SCIENCE

41158

SHARP 40630, 40675,

40752, 41256,

41556, 41642,

42002

SHARPER IMAGE

41117

SHERWOOD 40770

SHINSONIC 40533, 40839

SLIM ART 40784

SONIC BLUE 40573, 40783,

40869, 41099

SONY 40533, 41533,

40864, 40772,

41033, 41069,

41070, 41431,

41633

SUPERSCAN 40821

SVA 40717

SYLVANIA 40675, 40821,

41268

SYMPHONIC 40675, 40821,

41268

TATUNG 40770

TEAC 40571, 40717,

40790

TECHNICS 40490, 40703

TECHNIKA 40770

TEVION 40651

THETA DIGITAL

40571

THOMSON 40522

TOSHIBA 40503, 40573,

40539, 40695,

41045, 41154,

41510, 41595,

41639

UNIMAX 40770

UNIVERSUM 40591

URBAN CONCEPTS

40503, 40539

US LOGIC 40839

VENTURER 40790

VICTOR 41241, 41597

WYSE 41652

XBOX 40522, 41708

YAMAHA 40490, 40539,

40545, 41282,

42000, 42001

YAMAKAWA 40872

ZENITH 40503, 40591,

40741, 40869

ZEUS 40784

LD PLAYER

AIWA 40203

CARVER 40064

DENON 40059, 40172,

40241

DISCO VISION

40023

FUNAI 40203

HITACHI 40023

KENWOOD 40236, 40258

MAGNAVOX 40064, 40217,

40241

MARANTZ 40064

MITSUBISHI 40059, 40241

NAD 40059

OPTIMUS 40059

PANASONIC 40204

PHILIPS 40064

PIONEER 40059, 40023,

40241

QUASAR 40204

REALISTIC 40203

SEGA 40023

SHARP 40001

SONY 40193, 40201

TECHNICS 40204

TOSHIBA 40059

VICTOR 40245

WARDS 40059

YAMAHA 40217

DVD RECORDER

ACCURIAN 51416

APEX DIGITAL

51056

ASPIRE DIGITAL

51168

COBY 51086

CYBERHOME 51129

DENON 50490

EMERSON 50675

FUNAI 50675

GATEWAY 51158

GO VIDEO 50741, 51158,

51304, 51730

HITACHI 51664, 51764

JVC 51164, 51275

LG 50741

LITEON 51158, 51416,

51440

MAGNAVOX 50646, 50675

MITSUBISHI 51629

PANASONIC 50490, 51010,

51011

PHILIPS 50646

PIONEER 50631, 51475,

51476

POLAROID 51086

RCA 50522

SAMSUNG 50490

SENSORY SCIENCE

51158

SHARP 50630, 50675,

51556, 51642,

52002

SONY 51033, 51069,

51070, 51431

SYLVANIA 50675

TOSHIBA 51510, 51639

VICTOR 51275

YAMAHA 52001

ZENITH 50741

CD PLAYER

ADC 60018

ADCOM 60234

AIWA 60157

AKAI 60083, 60643,

61688

ALBA 60625

ANAM NATIONAL

60362

ARCAM 60157

AUDIO RESEARCH

60157

CAIRN 60157

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

60029, 60303

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

60157

CARVER 60157

CCE 60643

CLASSIC 61297

CURTIS MATHES

60032

DENON 60873, 60626,

60003, 60034,

60766

DKK 60000

DMX ELECTRONICS

60157

FISHER 60000, 61325

GEMINI 60625

GENEXXA 60032

GOLDSTAR 61208

GPX 61296

GRUNDIG 60157

HARMAN/KARDON

60100, 60157,

60083, 61202

HITACHI 60032

INKEL 60157, 60180

INTEGRA 60101

JERROLD 60003

JVC 60032, 60072,

61294

KENWOOD 60681, 60826,

60626, 60000,

60029, 60028,

60190, 61683

KOSS 61317

KRELL 60157

KYOCERA 60018

LG 61208

LINN 60157

LUXMAN 60328, 60489

MAGNAVOX 60157, 60038,

60274

MARANTZ 60626, 60029,

60157, 60038,

60180, 60373,

60435

MATSUI 60157

MCS 60029, 60043

MEMOREX 60000, 60032,

60468

MGA 60083

MICROMEGA 60157

MIRO 60000

MISSION 60157

MITSUBISHI 60083, 60808

MODULAIRE 60000, 60032,

60087, 60180,

60468

MTC 60625

NAKAMICHI 60147, 60373

NEC 60043, 60234

NIKKO 60362, 60625

NSM 60157

ONKYO 60868, 61327,

60101, 61685

OPTIMUS 61063, 60000,

60032, 60087,

60468

PANASONIC 60029, 60303,

60388, 60752,

61682

PENNEY 60029

PHILIPS 60626, 60157,

60274

PIONEER 61063, 61062,

60032, 61087,

60468

POLK AUDIO 60157

PROTON 60157

QED 60157

QUAD 60157

QUASAR 60029

RADIOSHACK 60000, 60032,

60180, 60468

RCA 61062, 60032,

60053, 60468

REALISTIC 60000, 60032,

60087, 60180,

60468

REVOX 60157

ROKSAN 60435

ROTEL 60157

SAE 60157

SAMSUNG 60524

SANSUI 60000, 60157

SANYO 60000, 60087

SHARP 60861, 60034,

60180, 61684

SHERWOOD 61067, 60180

SHURE 60043

SONIC FRONTIERS

60157

SONY 60490, 60000,

60100, 61364,

60185, 61790

STS 60018

SUGDEN 60157

SYLVANIA 60157

SYMPHONIC 60180

TAG MCLARE N

60157

TANDY 60032

TDK 61208

TEAC 60490, 60180,

60362

TECHNICS 60029, 60303

TECHWOOD 60303, 60362

THULE AUDIO

60157

TOSHIBA 61693, 61694

VICTOR 60072

WARDS 60032, 60157,

60053, 60087

YAMAHA 60490, 60868,

60888, 60036,

61292, 62000,

62001

YBA 60625

YORX 60000

CD RECORDER

CLASSIC 71297

DENON 70626

FISHER 71325

GPX 71296

HARMAN/KARDON

71202

JVC 71294

KENWOOD 70626

LG 71208

MARANTZ 70626

PHILIPS 70626

PIONEER 71062, 71087

RCA 70053

SONY 70000, 70100,

71364

TDK 71208

YAMAHA 70888, 71292

MD RECORDER

DENON 70873

KENWOOD 70681, 70826,

71683

ONKYO 70868, 71685

OPTIMUS 71063

PANASONIC 71682

PIONEER 71063

SHARP 70861, 71684

SHERWOOD 71067

SONY 70490, 71790

YAMAHA 70490, 70888,

72001

TAPE DECK

AIWA 70197

DENON 70076, 70371,

70412

GARRARD 70308, 70309

JVC 70244, 70273

KENWOOD 70070, 70205,

70365

NIKKO 70365

ONKYO 70135, 70282

OPTIMUS 70027

PANASONIC 70229

PIONEER 70027, 70099

RCA 70027

SHARP 70205, 70371,

70412

SONY 70243, 70170,

70291

TEAC 70308, 70309,

70365

TECHNICS 70229

TECHNOVOX 70229

TECHWOOD 70365

VICTOR 70273

WARDS 70027

YAMAHA 70097, 70205,

70524

TUNER

ADC 80531

AIWA 81405, 80158,

80121, 81388,

81641

ALCO 81390

ANAM 81609, 81074

ARCAM 81189

AUDIO PRO 80148

AUDIOTRONIC

81189

AUDIOVOX 81390

BOSE 81229, 81933

CAPETRONIC 80531

CARVER 81189, 80121

CURTIS MATHES

80014, 80080

DELPHI 81414, 81846

DENON 81360, 80121,

80386, 81142

EMERSON 80531

FISHER 80219

GARRARD 80281

GOLDSTAR 80281

GRUNDIG 80281

HARMAN/KARDON

80110

HITACHI 80386

INTEGRA 80135, 80842,

81298, 81320

JBL 80110

JVC 81058, 80074,

80262, 80464,

81374, 81495,

81665

KAWASAKI 81390

KENWOOD 80027, 80186,

80262

KLH 81390

LG 80281

MAGNAVOX 81189, 81269,

80531, 81266

MARANTZ 81189, 81269,

80039, 81671

MCS 80039

MICROMEGA

81189

MYRYAD 81189

ONKYO 80135, 80380,

80842, 81298,

81320, 81677

OPTIMUS 81023, 80158,

80074, 80014,

80080, 80121,

80186, 80219,

80531, 81074

PANASONIC 81308, 81518,

80039, 80367,

81275, 81288,

81316, 81548,

81633, 81675,

81763, 81764

PENNEY 80039

PHILIPS 81189, 81269,

81266

PIONEER 81023, 80014,

80080, 80150,

80281, 80531,

80630, 81284,

81384, 81678

POLK AUDIO 81414

PROSCAN 81254

QUASAR 80039

RADIOSHACK

81609

RCA 81023, 81609,

81254, 80080,

80531, 81074,

81390, 81511

REALISTIC 81609, 80158,

80121, 80186

SANSUI 81189, 80148,

81764

SANYO 80219

SHARP 80186, 80262

SONIC 80281

SONY 81058, 81441,

81258, 81759,

81622, 80158,

81406, 81558,

81658, 81758,

81858

STEREOPHONICS

81023

TEAC 81074, 81390

TECHNICS 81308, 81518,

80039, 81384,

81633, 81675

TECHWOOD 80281

THORENS 81189

TOSHIBA 80080, 80135,

80842

VENTURER 81390

VICTOR 80074

WARDS 80158, 80014,

80080

XM 81406, 81414,

81846

YAMAHA 81023, 80176,

80186, 80376,

81176, 81276,

81331, 81375,

82004

(TUNER ID1) 82005

(TUNER ID2) 81949

(XM ID1) 82006

(XM ID2) 82007

ZENITH 80281

OTHER AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

YAMAHA 82001, 82002

(iPod) 82000

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V661

Printed in Malaysia WJ69940

RX-V661

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V661_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 7:25 PM

■ Front panel

RX-V861/RX-V661

VOLUME

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

ON/OFF

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROL OPTIMIZER MIC

234

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

MEMORY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

ON/OFF

ZONE 2

CONTROL

ZONE

PRESET/TUNING/CH

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

OFF

234 5 6789

ACDEHBIJF

00_Sheet_RX-V861_661_U.book Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 5:49 PM

■ Remote control

REC

SCENE

1234

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AMP

SOURCE

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

AUDIO SEL

DOCK

CBL

PHONO

MUTE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

4321

SLEEP

MOVIE

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

CLASSICAL

ENT

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENHANCER

NIGHT

SUR. DECODE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

CD CD-R

TUNER XM

V-AUX

DVD

DVR VCR

DTV

4321

MOVIE

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

CLASSICAL

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENHANCER

NIGHT

SUR. DECODE

QRST

WK14480

Printed in Malaysia

00_Sheet_RX-V861_661_U.book Page i Friday, December 8, 2006 5:49 PM

RX-V661

Page 35 (footnote *2)

Incorrect

You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this

unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects

“DOCK” as the input source automatically.

Correct

You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this

unit.

WK52460

Printed in Malaysia

Transcripción de documentos

RX-V661_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 7:25 PM U RX-V661 RX-V661 AV Receiver © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WJ69940 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Important safety instructions 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, Important safety instructions d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. Caution-iii 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents Notice ....................................................................... 2 Features ................................................................... 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Getting started ........................................................ 4 Quick start guide .................................................... 5 Connections ........................................................... 11 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room .................................... 28 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28 BASIC OPERATION Advanced sound configurations...........................61 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 61 Selecting decoders ................................................... 66 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........69 Using SET MENU................................................... 71 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 72 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 78 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 81 Remote control features........................................84 Using the remote control for the SCENE feature......................................... 84 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ............................................ 85 Setting remote control codes ................................... 87 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 88 Using multi-zone configuration............................89 Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 89 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 90 Advanced setup......................................................92 Basic procedure ....................................................... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 39 Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor............................................... 39 Using your headphones............................................ 40 Muting the audio output........................................... 40 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source.................. 40 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41 Using the advanced setup ........................................ 92 Sound field programs .......................................... 42 Using audio features ............................................. 48 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 49 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49 Troubleshooting.....................................................96 Resetting the system............................................103 Glossary................................................................104 Sound field program information......................106 Parametric equalizer information .....................107 Specifications .......................................................108 Index .....................................................................110 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42 Sound field program descriptions............................ 42 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) .................................... 47 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Playback ................................................................ 37 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33 PREPARATION PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50 APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50 Manual tuning.......................................................... 50 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51 Selecting preset stations........................................... 52 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52 XM Satellite Radio tuning ................................... 53 Using iPod™.......................................................... 58 Controlling iPod™................................................... 58 “1 SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. Recording .............................................................. 60 1 En English Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 53 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 54 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 56 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 57 NOTICE Notice About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1 SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 2 En “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Features Features HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 90 W + 90 W Center: 90 W Surround: 90 W + 90 W Surround back: 90 W + 90 W ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a iPod controlling capability SCENE function ◆ 18 preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability ◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support component (some models only) working with the SCENE function Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability INTRODUCTION Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ Bi-amplification connection capability ◆ Sleep timer XM Satellite Radio ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM MiniTuner Dock” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience ◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R MD STANDBY POWER Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) AM loop antenna MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL CBL DVD DTV TUNER XM V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE DOCK AMP SOURCE TV CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 2 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 8 SLEEP +10 PRESET/CH LEVEL ENT SET MENU MENU TITLE SRCH MODE BAND Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC SCENE 1 2 3 4 English Note The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 3 En GETTING STARTED Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 1 3 Caution 2 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the V TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 En ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication Quick start guide Quick start guide Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker INTRODUCTION The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Preparation: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 6 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 7 The following items are not included in the package of this unit. ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers .................................... 2 ❏ Center speaker ................................... 1 ❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. Center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ............................................... 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor........................................... 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 9 ❏ Video cable .............................................. 1 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1 Enjoy DVD playback! English 5 En Quick start guide Step 1: Set up your speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT L L R R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Front speakers and center speaker VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO DOCK CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL CD DVD 1 2 3 4 5 6 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA IN HDMI XM DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y Loosen Insert Tighten DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD OUT FRONT A R L MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE SINGLE 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. Center speaker To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Surround and surround back speakers Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker 4 To the surround back left speaker To the surround left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 5 To the surround back right speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and the input jack of the subwoofer. Subwoofer AV receiver SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Input jack Subwoofer cable 6 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components MULTI CH INPUT L R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO DOCK CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND XM SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL PR ANTENNA IN HDMI MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y AV receiver OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L MONITOR OUT R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN OUT TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE INTRODUCTION AUDIO L R 2 SINGLE DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this unit. Video cable Connect the video cable to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video input jack of your video monitor. Video monitor AV receiver DVD player AV receiver Video input jack Digital coaxial audio output jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio cable VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack DVD DIGITAL INPUT coaxial jack English 7 En Quick start guide 4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and indoor FM antenna to this unit. See page 24 for the connection information. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 12 • Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 18 AM loop antenna • Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 19 • Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder ☞ P. 20 • Connecting a set-top box Indoor FM antenna Open the lever Insert ☞ P. 20 Close the lever • Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a turntable ☞ P. 21 • Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a DVD player via analog multichannel audio connection y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 23 Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna • Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 23 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 23 • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 24 • Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock 5 ☞ P. 53 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. y This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for details. Note The type of the power plug is different depending on the models. 8 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can automatically activate the DVD player and start playback when you press the F SCENE1 button. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 93). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel. 5 INTRODUCTION y Rotate 0 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons 3 Press F SCENE1 button. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired sources. Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the background music for this room...” Press F SCENE2 (or F SCENE2) to select “Disc Listening”. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” Press F SCENE3 (or F SCENE3) to select “TV Viewing”. Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the FM/AM radio station...” The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 9 En English y Press F SCENE4 (or F SCENE4) to select “Radio Listening”. Quick start guide Notes • To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to this unit in advance. See page 20 for details. • To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 33 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 36 y If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 33 for details. ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ■ After using this unit... Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode. ☞ P. 37 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 50 • Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 53 • Using your iPod with this unit. ☞ P. 58 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 42 • Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity sound ☞ P. 48 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 61 This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press the desired F SCENE buttons (or F SCENE) or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or H POWER on the remote control). See page 25 for details. ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 28 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit manually ☞ P. 71 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 84 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 92 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 41 10 En CONNECTIONS Connections Rear panel AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT jacks Connect external amplifiers and an active subwoofer. ☞ P. 22 CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE VIDEO CENTER VIDEO L L PREPARATION MULTI CH INPUT jacks Connect the input source component equipped with the multi-channel output jacks. ☞ P. 22 DOCK terminal Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately). ☞ P. 23 Video jacks Connect the video cable plugs. ☞ P. 18-20 ZONE 2 OUT jacks Connect the amplifier in Zone 2. ☞ P. 89 AUDIO jacks Connect the analog audio cable plugs. ☞ P. 18-21 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Connect the XM MiniTuner Dock (sold separately). ☞ P. 53 GND PHONO DOCK S VIDEO R R CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND XM SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA DTV/CBL CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 OUT DVR IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD FRONT A R C MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L R L R DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. OUT PRESENCE DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks Connect the digital audio cable plugs. ☞ P. 19-21 SINGLE Speaker terminals Connect the speakers. ANTENNA terminals Connect the FM and AM antenna. ☞ P. 24 ANTENNA AM GND ☞ P. 13 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) ☞ P. 4 HDMI connectors Connect the HDMI components. ☞ P. 16 AC OUTLET(S) ☞ P. 24 FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN OUT TRIGGER +12V 15mA MAX. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Connect the remote control input and output jacks of the Yamaha components. ☞ P. 23 English TRIGGER OUT Outputs the control signals to external components. 11 En Connections . Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. PL PR C FR FL PR FR PL SW FL 30˚ C SL SR SR SBR SBL SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR 1.8 m (6 ft) 30 cm (12 in) or more Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 72). 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL 1.8 m (6 ft) PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) C Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 12 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Note PREPARATION Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display when you turn on this unit. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 93). A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. EXTRA SP terminals Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72). Subwoofer y You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29). PRE OUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L R L R PRESENCE L SINGLE Left Right Surround speakers Center speaker Left Right Front speakers (FRONT A) When you use single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 13 En English Left Right Surround back speakers Connections ■ Connecting the speaker cable 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Using bi-amplification connections Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support biamplification. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 95). Front speakers Right 4 Left Tighten the knob to secure the wire. FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP L R SINGLE L This unit Note When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. 14 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs AUDIO R (White) (Red) L R Left and right analog audio cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (Orange) C Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. PREPARATION L Video jacks and cable plugs S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 17 and 81 for details. English 15 En Connections Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. HDMI HDMI cable plug y This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 41). 16 En ■ HDMI jack and cable plug • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Output Input HDMI Output HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) AUDIO PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion ON (see page 81) Notes Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 77). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • This unit does not accept analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution. • The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded. • This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals. English 17 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 77). VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y OUT MONITOR OUT PR HDMI in PB Y Component video in S S-video in Video in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 18 En V Connections Connecting other components Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes ■ Connecting a DVD player PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 81), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 81), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 78). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. DVD player Optical out Audio out Coaxial out Video out S-video out Component video out HDMI out R O L C V S PR PB Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DVD DVD HDMI PR DVD A PB DVD COMPONENT VIDEO Y DVD 3 6 OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD IN1 DIGITAL INPUT indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections English 19 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR DVD recorder, PVR or VCR S-video in Audio out Audio in Video in Video out R L R L S-video out V V S AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO IN DVR OUT IN VCR IN OUT DVR OUT IN OUT VCR COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB C S S V Video in S-video in S-video out Video out Audio in L V Y DVR PR PB Y Component video out R Audio out L R DVD recorder, PVR ■ Connecting a set-top box Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder S-video out Video out Component video out R HDMI out L Audio out Optical out O V PR PB S Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DTV/CBL DTV/CBL HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT 20 En DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL B P B Y Connections ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 78). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. CD player L R C Coaxial out R Audio out Audio out Ground L PREPARATION Turntable AUDIO L GND R PHONO IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD MD/CD-R MD/CD-R 1 2 5 DIGITAL INPUT R L R L Audio in O Audio out Optical in Optical out O CD COAXIAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD recorder, MD recorder or tape deck English indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 21 En Connections ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes • • • • • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48). Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48). Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 72) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 72). 5 PRE OUT SINGLE CENTER L 3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack. Notes R FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER 1 2 3 4 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks. • The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see page 72). 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 80), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 80) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. MULTI CH INPUT CENTER MULTI CH INPUT CENTER L SB(8CH) R L R L SURROUND R SUB WOOFER Center out R SB(8CH) Subwoofer out L FRONT(6CH) Surround out Front out Center out R Multi-format player/External decoder (5.1-channel output) Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) *1 22 En R SUB WOOFER Subwoofer out Surround out Front out L SURROUND Surround back out FRONT(6CH) R L *1 R L L The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 80). Connections ■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. • If the components have the capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding components and start the playback when you use one of the SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components. • Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote control input jack of the components to control the components by using the SCENE feature. • If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup menu to “OFF” (see page 95). Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. PREPARATION DOCK y Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL REMOTE IN Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O OUT Remote control in S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Yamaha component Game console or video camera English 23 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable (U.S.A. model) Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. y See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna. Notes AC OUTLETS • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. AM loop antenna (supplied) ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) ANTENNA AM GND FM Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 24 En To the AC wall outlet U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when B MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 108. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. Connections Setting the speaker impedance Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. 1 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL on the front panel and then press B MASTER ON/ OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. “SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting (“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display. ■ Turning on this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turns on this unit by pressing B MASTER ON/OFF, the main zone is turned on. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Turning off this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Notes • A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as H POWER and G STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode 4 Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or G STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. PREPARATION 2 Make sure this unit is turned off. Refer to the right column for details. Turning this unit on and off ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or H POWER) to turn on the main zone. y • You can also turn on the main zone by pressing F SCENE (or F SCENE) buttons. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • These buttons are operational only when B MASTER ON/ OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. English 25 En Connections Front panel display Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 54. 1 2 t 3 4 VCR 96 24 VIRTUAL V-AUX DTV/CBL 8 DVD 9 MD/CD-R TUNER 0 CD SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT HiFi DSP SLEEP q PL neural D E VOLUME G H I J K L M dB MUTE 96/24 LFE mS dB F PHONO XM ft PCM C A YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY q DIGITAL q PL x q PL B DVR 7 6 DOCK MATRIX DISCRETE DSD ENHANCER q EX 5 L C R SL SB SR N O D ........ U.S.A. and Canada models only 1B Input signal indicators Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 2CD Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. 9 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite Radio tuning mode (see pages 50 to 57). 0 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40). A VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 46). E Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. 4 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16). F VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 46). 5 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 46). G Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40). 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23) and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode. 7 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 8 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 28). 26 En H SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. I ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 90). J NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 49). K DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected (see page 42). Connections L Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. M SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41). Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Remote control sensor N 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. O Input channel and speaker indicators L C R SL SB SR LFE indicator Presence speaker indicators Input channel indicators 30 Surround back speaker indicators 30 Approximately 6 m (20 ft) LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 72) and “SB L/R SP” (see page 73) in “SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup (see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74) procedure. y • You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by adjusting settings for “SB L/R SP” (see page 73) in “SOUND MENU”. • To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 or 72). PREPARATION LFE Infrared window (W) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. V TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. Operation mode selector (K) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 86). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85). Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 87. English 27 En OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL y • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to K AMP. • This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment. 1 The following menu screen appears on the video monitor. AUTO:MENU . EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL START [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ 3 [ Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Omni-directional microphone Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 28 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 4 Press D l / h to select the desired setting for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press D n. 6 Extra speaker assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE • When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 90) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2 speakers by using the internal amplifier. • When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 95), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. Press D n to select “START” and then press D ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD. Press D l / h to select “SETUP”. Notes Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. Note 5 7 PREPARATION Parametric equalizer type EQ Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment from the following choices. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. • When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Press D l / h to select the desired setting of “EQ” and then press D n. Notes • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see page 95) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72). English 29 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit performs the following checks: The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Equalizing EQUALIZING Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the speakers by the setting of “EQ”. Notes • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 32. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 32). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. Speaker level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. The display changes as follows. AUTO:MENU EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL . START [ [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ AUTO:CHECK [ INITIALIZING . WIRING SIZE/DISTANCE EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECKCH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []:Exit 8 Press D ENTER to display the setup results in detail. AUTO:RESULT AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 14.0/17.0ft LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 14.0/17.0ft LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return 30 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 9 Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. 10 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. Results of the speaker connection and wiring AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 14.0/17.0ft LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the speaker distance from the listening position Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press D l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Results of the setting of each speaker size AUTO:RESULT PREPARATION 11 RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 14.0/17.0ft LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB . > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. Results of the speaker output level 12 y Press D ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 69). SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO Notes p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same frequency to provide finer adjustments. 13 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. y 31 En English If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ If an error screen appears 2 Press D k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press D ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING:W-1 <OUT OF PHASE> Reverse Channel FL -CENTER PL PR SL SR SBL SBR [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return AUTO:ERROR . E-9:USER CANCEL Don't operate any function. >RETRY EXIT y [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press D ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. AUTO:RESULT . WARNING(3) RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 14.0/17.0ft LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 32 En • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 101. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 18 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening Rotate the I INPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press D l / h) to select the desired template. DVD MovieView If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. Select the desired SCENE template 3 Press the F SCENE (or F SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the SCENE button. 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Front panel or BASIC OPERATION 1 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 84 for details. Press and hold the F SCENE (or F SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds or 1 1 Remote control Front panel 1 Flashes English DVD Viewing 33 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Which component do you like for playback? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) DVD SCENE templates Default SCENE buttons DVD Viewing 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc Hifi Listening Music Disc Listening Disc Listening CD 2 CD Hifi Listening CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs * Radio Listening XM XM Listening * iPod Listening To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 58). DTV/CBL TV Viewing TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Action Game Playing RPG Playing Vinyl records PHONO LP Record Listening y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details. 34 En 4 To enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs, you need to connect the XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) and activate the service (see page 53). DOCK iPod TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) 3 Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting. SCENE template Input source Playback mode DVD Viewing DVD*1 Features STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing DVD*1 MOVIE Sci-Fi Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD*1 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live video on your DVD player. DVR Viewing DVR MOVIE Drama Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Disc Hifi Listening DVD*1 PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. Music Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. CD Hifi Listening CD*1 PURE DIRECT CD Listening CD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD Music Listening CD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music source on your CD player as the background music. Radio Listening TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. XM Listening XM MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs. iPod Listening DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock. TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general programs on your TV. TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on your TV. Action Game Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game Select this SCENE template when you play action games such as car racing and FPS games. RPG Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing games. LP Record Listening PHONO PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on the DVD player. 1 4 Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. BASIC OPERATION 2 3 When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features. *2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects “DOCK” as the input source automatically. 35 En English *1 Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl records on your turntable. Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 18 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template • INPUT: • MODE: The input source component. The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode. • NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49). − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. SCENE template library (Image) 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press and hold the desired F SCENE button for 3 seconds. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. [ SCENE1 .pDVDViewing[ INPUT: DVD MODE:STRAIGHT NIGHT:SYSTEM [ENTER]:Rename [SCENE1]:SET [RETURN]:STATUS Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the F SCENE buttons, press D l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. 36 En Press D k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then D l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 4 Press the F SCENE button again to confirm the edit. y An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding F SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 84 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned SCENE button. ■ Rename the SCENE templates Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3 of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and then press D ENTER. • Press D k / n to select the desired character. • Press D l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press E RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press D ENTER to confirm the new name. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. y 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 50 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 54 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. 4 Rotate 0 VOLUME (or press J VOLUME +/ –) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 80). y y Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to K AMP. Basic procedure 1 5 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. y See page 40 to display the input source information. 2 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (P) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 42 for details about sound field programs. Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (A)) to select the desired input source. BASIC OPERATION • See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker. • This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. • You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume level (see page 77). Sci-Fi The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Currently selected sound field program Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM PHONO INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source y The corresponding input selector button on the remote control for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. Note Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected sound field program in the OSD, see page 61 for details. English 37 En Playback Selecting the front speaker set ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... See page Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 61 Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49 Use headphones 40 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49 Select a decoder to play back sources with 66 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input source. Rotate the I INPUT selector to select MULTI CH (or A MULTI CH IN). “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. y Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 80). Note Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or FRONT B) on or off. Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals. The active front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A OFF FRONT B FRONT A and FRONT B Notes • FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or “NONE” (see page 72). • Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 72), you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see page 46). 38 En Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the same input source. You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press O DISPLAY on the remote control. The current status screen appears in the OSD. y • We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 82). Press H AUDIO SELECT (or I AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM PHONO A.SEL:AUTO Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order:(1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. y You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). BASIC OPERATION MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF Note The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks and will not be recorded. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 78). English 39 En Playback Using your headphones Playing video sources in the background of an audio source Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF Press the input selector buttons (A) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF SILENT CINEMA EFFECT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL MD Audio sources MULTI CH IN CD CD-R DVD DTV TUNER XM DVR VCR PHONO CBL Video sources DOCK V-AUX y y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 46). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 80). Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Press L MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press L MUTE again to resume the audio output. SET MENU y [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 40 En . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p • You can also rotate 0 VOLUME on the front panel or press J VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 76). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press N SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 2 Press D n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press D ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. 3 Press D l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. Playback 4 Press N SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. ■ Audio information Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24). Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press M SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press M SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. BASIC OPERATION FORMAT Using the sleep timer Flashes ■ Video information HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 101 for details. SLEEP SLEEP120min Lights up SLEEP STRAIGHT ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press M SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. Disappears SLEEPOFF The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. 41 En English y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing G STANDBY (or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main zone to the standby mode. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 61 for details. Selecting sound field programs Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (P) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Notes source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. • When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Name of the program Category of the program Created sound fields CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY Available sound field parameters (see page 63) Sound field indicators Presence sound field Listening position Surround left sound field Surround back sound field 42 En Surround right sound field SB ROOM SIZE DIALG. LIFT Program description Sound field programs ■ For audio music sources y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48). Notes • The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL 1 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Chamber HiFi DSP BASIC OPERATION This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY The Bottom Line REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT English 43 En Sound field programs ■ For various sources Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For visual sources of music Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 44 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Sound field programs ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 66 for details. Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP LEVEL S. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE S.LIVENESS MOVIE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT Spectacle DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY MOVIE Sci-Fi SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT BASIC OPERATION This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY English DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT 45 En Sound field programs ■ Stereo playback Note The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details. DIRECT STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL ■ The Compressed Music Enhancer ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. Effect level ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Effect level ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 73), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 42). SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode. 46 En Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47). Sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press E STRAIGHT (or S STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. STRAIGHT ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode BASIC OPERATION Press E STRAIGHT (or S STRAIGHT) so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. English 47 En USING AUDIO FEATURES Using audio features y Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to K AMP. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press G PURE DIRECT (or T PURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. The G PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 74). 1 Press C LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Notes Display • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. 2 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 48 En Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker • Once you press C LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing D k / n. • Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SB L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73). • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). FRONT L y y 1 Adjusted speaker 2 Press D l / h to adjust the speaker output level. • Press D h to increase the value. • Press D l to decrease the value. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Using audio features Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Press P STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. y Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: –when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected. –when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). –when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 74). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel. • See page 66 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo” mode. Selecting the night listening mode 1 BASIC OPERATION The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Press R NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press D l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. English 49 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Lights up AUTO AFM88.9MHz AFM88.9MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press 5 h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press 5 l to tune into a lower frequency. 50 En No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Notes Automatic preset tuning • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” below. You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 3 You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station. See page 50 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY on the front panel. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. Flashes AUTO MEMORY BASIC OPERATION Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Manual preset tuning MEMORY A1:FM88.9MHz Flashes Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing and holding 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY A:FM88.9MHz Preset station group Colon (:) English 51 En FM/AM tuning 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press 5 h to select a higher preset station number. • Press 5 l to select a lower preset station number. 2 Flashes Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY A1:FM88.9MHz A1:FM88.9MHz Preset station number Exchanging preset stations 5 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. A1:FM88.9MHz You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. 2 Press and hold 2 EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. The displayed station has been stored as A1. Notes Flashes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. MEMORY E1:FM88.9MHz Flashes Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. 3 y Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to K SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or press D A-E/CAT. l / h) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. 52 En Flashes MEMORY A5:FM88.9MHz Flashes 4 Press 2 EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio tuning XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca. This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Note The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. BASIC OPERATION Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Dock. y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 83) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level in the OSD. For the best reception, orient the connected the XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed. XM Note If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the XM Mini-Tuner Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock (sold separately) English 53 En XM Satellite Radio tuning Activating XM Satellite Radio Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM Satellite Radio operations y Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to K SOURCE. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press A XM) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Note Lights up The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677). VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM PHONO [001] Preview y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 55. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 55. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 55. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access mode” on page 55. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 67). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 56). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 57). 54 En XM Satellite Radio tuning Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to K SOURCE. 3 ■ All Channel Search mode Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or D PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). y 1 2 Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or N SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or D PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. y ■ Category Search mode 1 2 3 Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or N SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. ■ Direct number access mode 1 Press N SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons (B) as shown below. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 2 ENTERTAIN 3 The display changes as follows. Press 4 CATEGORY (or D A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. BASIC OPERATION • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or D PRESET/CH k / n). • To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (B). <XM> --1 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or D PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. <XM> -12 y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 56. y The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “[001] Preview”. Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or N SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press 4 CATEGORY (or D A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (B) on the remote control and then press M ENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing M ENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (B) or M ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 55 En English 1 <XM>123 XM Satellite Radio tuning Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 4 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 55. Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or D PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 54 for details. C5 [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel number 5 [043] XMU Currently selected channel number 2 Press 6 MEMORY (or E XM MEMORY) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Press 6 MEMORY (or E XM MEMORY). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. C5:[043] XMU Colon (:) MEMORY Flashes Note Note You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 3 Press 4 CATEGORY (or D A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY C [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 56 En Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. XM Satellite Radio tuning Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 96 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display If you press 7 DISPLAY (or O DISPLAY) while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press 7 DISPLAY (or O DISPLAY). The following screen is displayed in the OSD. Channel number / name BASIC OPERATION Press 7 DISPLAY (or O DISPLAY) repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. Note XM INFORMATION ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE:Speed of sound .( Coldplay/Spe) [ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL [[]/[[]:CATEGORY Channel category Artist name / Song title y When the channel number / name is displayed: [043] XMU When the channel category is displayed: <CAT>ROCK When the artist name / song title is displayed: • To turn off the OSD, press 7 DISPLAY (or O DISPLAY) again. • You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSDSOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press D ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press D ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press C TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is hold. Coldplay / Clo English 57 En USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 86. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 101. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 83). The DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode. Controlling iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode y y • The name of the song being played also appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). • You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSDSOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Notes You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. 58 En Using iPod™ 1 Set the operation mode selector to K SOURCE and then press O DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings ■ The function of the play information display 7 All 1 2 3 4 Top > > > > > > > iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 5 6 8 9 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 2 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward) and w (search backward) BASIC OPERATION Press D k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press D ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 9 Remaining time Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. y When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. y When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 All English 59 En RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Caution The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 74) and the sound field programs (see page 42) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (A)) to select the source component you want to record from. 60 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Advanced sound configurations Changing sound field parameter settings 4 You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. PARAMETER Cursor Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 82). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press O DISPLAY on the remote control. The following status screen appears in the OSD. MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF [RETURN]:STATUS y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 63. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press D k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold D l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 82). • You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). 5 3 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons (P) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. MOVIE Sci-Fi 1/2 PROLOGIC DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;16ms P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms . ADVANCED OPERATION STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Press D k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then D l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. Press O DISPLAY to turn off the sound field parameter display. English 61 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Basic configuration of sound field programs y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details. Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (DIALG.LIFT) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/ or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP LEVEL) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds. The ideal dialogue position. If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position. The DSP effect sound level is low. The DSP effect sound level is high. Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows: Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 “0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest position. Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when Notes • The effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. • You cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. • “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when • The sound is vague. • You feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB 62 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail. y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details. Sound field parameter Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. y When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Features Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 63 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 64 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Level REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Source sound REV. LEVEL English Time 65 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter 2ch Stereo DIRECT Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 72). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 73) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 72). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 2ch Enhancer 7ch Enhancer 2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. Control range: 0 to 100% Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs (Decoder Type) Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field program. Available decoders Decoder Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73). Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources 66 En Selecting decoders ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press Q SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired surround decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY and then D k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing D l / h repeatedly on the remote control. Advanced sound configurations ■ Decoder descriptions Category of the program Name of the program SURROUND DECODE PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic Remote control button SUR.DECODE 9 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 63) SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music PANORAMA SUR.DECODE 9 DIMENSION SURROUND DECODE CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PL II Game ADVANCED OPERATION Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73). Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE SUR.DECODE 9 Neural Sur. SURROUND DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. 67 En English The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surroundincompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. Advanced sound configurations Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 68 En CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal. 72 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 74 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 75 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 75 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 76 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 76 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 76 H)HDMI SET Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 77 I)EXTD SUR. Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback. 77 ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 78 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 79 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 80 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 80 E)MULTI CH SET Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the multi channel input. 80 English 69 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 81 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 82 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. 82 D)PARAM.INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 82 E)ZONE 2 SET Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters. 82 F)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. 83 G)DOCK SET Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. 83 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40). 70 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • Press E RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 1 MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 4 1 SOUND MENU . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p p Set the operation mode selector to K AMP and then press N SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SOUND MENU E)LFE LEVEL 2 . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB Press D k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and then D ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. p Press D k / n to select the desired parameter and then D l / h to change the parameter settings. 6 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU ADVANCED OPERATION 5 MANUAL SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust English 71 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 1 SOUND MENU Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 28). MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. SOUND MENU . EXTRA SP ASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONT B PRESENCE NONE FRONT B;;;;FRONT PRIORITY;;;;;--ZONE2 SET Not Available Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 90) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Notes • This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”. • If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 95), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. • After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out “AUTO SETUP” again (See page 28). 72 En FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room. • Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46). Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SUR. B • Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channels will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU FRONT SP SMALL >LARGE SUR. L/R SP NONE >SML LRG When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 72), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION SUR.B L/R SP SOUND MENU CENTER SP SMLx1 >SMLx2 NONE >SML LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. LRGx1 When the surround back left and right speakers are large Select “LRGx2” (large x 2). When the single surround back speaker is large Select “LRGx1” (large x 1). When the surround back left and right speakers are small Select “SMLx2” (small x 2). When the single surround back speaker is small Select “SMLx1” (small x 1). When you do not use the surround back speakers Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. English 73 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU LFE/BASS OUT SUBWOOFER PHASE SWFR FRNT>BOTH When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. Bass crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 73). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 73). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz SOUND MENU >NORMAL REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB SOUND MENU . SPEAKER LEVEL B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SWFR;;;;;;;;;; Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SBR Surround back right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PL Presence left speaker PR Presence right speaker CROSSOVER Notes FREQ;;;80Hz 74 En • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73). Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE ■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF SOUND MENU D)EQUALIZER SOUND MENU . C)SP DISTANCE 1/2 Adjusted speaker • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28). • Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. Press D k / n to display the graphic equalizer screen. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Note When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28), “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. Test tone TEST SOUND MENU p . TEST >OFF ON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p FRONT L ADVANCED OPERATION Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/ PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. [ ]/[]:CT GEQ [p]/[[]:Select p p p . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONT L;;;10.0ft FRONT R;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;10.0ft SWFR;;;;;;10.0ft [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust SP DISTANCE EQ TYPE SELECT CENTER GEQ Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. Notes English • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73). 75 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5 frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and 10 kHz). Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB SOUND MENU 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p p TEST >OFF ON -______+ . 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. SOUND MENU F)DYNAMIC RANGE y Press D k / n to select a frequency band and D l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. . SP: MIN STD>MAX HP: MIN STD>MAX The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB SOUND MENU Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTING TYPE;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p E)LFE LEVEL p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Note . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 72), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 76 En Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 40). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX VOL.” setting. • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 83). Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 83). ■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. ■ Extended surround decoders I)EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO [p]/[[]:Select Mode MODE Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving. Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF • Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input. • Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using the selected decoder type in “TYPE”. • Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. Decoder type TYPE SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON TYPE;;;PLIIxMovie p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select H)HDMI SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V661 [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”. Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX • Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. • Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. • Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. • Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. 77 En English Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V661, OTHER • Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. p SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION Notes Note Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) y Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly. Notes Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. MANUAL SETUP 2 INPUT MENU p . A)I/O ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input sources. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 73) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 73) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when this unit is in the stereo playback, Compressed Music Enhancer (see page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode. – when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 95). • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. 2 INPUT MENU ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). y The input source name in parentheses indicates the default assigned input source. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) 78 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU INPUT MENU HDMI IN . [IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. DVD -> MY DVD [[]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. y 1 Press one of the input selector buttons (A) on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. 2 Press D l / h to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR 3 Press D k / n to select the character you want to use and then press D l / h to move to the next space. ADVANCED OPERATION • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) (3);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) p INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME p For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU Notes INPUT MENU • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press D n to change the character in the following order, or press D k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. COAXIAL IN . (5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press D ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. English 79 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) C)VOLUME TRIM MY DVD DVD -> 0.0dB [[]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit y • You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. • The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source appears in the OSD. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE . >AUTO CD MD/CD-R DVD 1/2 LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO E)MULTI CH SET Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel input. INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;6CH [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST, OFF • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals. • Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals. Front input FRONT INPUT MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used for the connected input source. E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;8CH FRONT;;; DVD p Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 80 En p INPUT MENU ■ Multi channel input settings p ■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog jacks at which the front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR y See page 22 for the connection information. Note The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU MANUAL SETUP 1/2 . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI 3 OPTION MENU 2/2 . E)ZONE2 SET F)XM RADIO SET G)DOCK SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU 1/2 . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEO CONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select A)DISPLAY SET . OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s FL SCROLL;;;CONT Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and component video signals interchangeably. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status and sound field parameters information screen after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press D l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press D h to make the front panel display brighter. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press D l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press D h to lower the position of the OSD. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. English 81 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON OPTION MENU B)MEMORY GUARD >OFF ON [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE OPTION MENU D)PARAM. INI CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB *ENTERTAINMENT *MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Press DSP Key Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. ■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return E)ZONE2 SET . MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate audio input jack select setting. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. OPTION MENU Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the “ZONE 2 OUT” jacks. 82 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 72), “Zone 2 SP Not Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET” parameter is not available. • The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the “ZONE 2 OUT” jacks. ■ XM Radio setting F)XM RADIO SET OPTION MENU ■ iPod universal dock setting G)DOCK SET OPTION MENU G)DOCK SET STANDBY CHARGE: AUTO [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 58). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. • Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. F)XM RADIO SET XM ANTENNA;;;95% [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 53). For the best reception, orient the XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 53). English 83 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 87). Using the remote control for the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 87). 1 2 Press the desired F SCENE button on the remote control. Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. POWER TV AV MD STANDBY POWER MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL CD-R CBL DVD If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired F SCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press and hold the F SCENE button and the desired input selector button (A). The V TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. 3 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in step 2 until the V TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice again. TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER CD ■ Setting the input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control DTV TUNER XM V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK AMP SOURCE * TV TV MUTE TV INPUT CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 Set to SOURCE ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 2 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 PRESET/CH LEVEL 8 SLEEP +10 ENT SET MENU MENU TITLE SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC SCENE 1 2 3 4 SCENE buttons Note * These buttons control the input source component. See page 86 for details of the function of each button. 84 En Note If the setting of the input source is not successful, the V TRANSMIT indicator flashes repeatedly. In this case, repeat the setup procedure. MUTE Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to K AMP to control this unit. Set the operation mode selector to K TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 87). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL CD CD-R DVD DTV TUNER XM DVR VCR PHONO POWER POWER TV AV CBL MD CD DOCK V-AUX AMP *1 STANDBY POWER MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL CD-R CBL *1 SOURCE TV VOL TRANSMIT CODE SET MD DVD DTV TUNER XM V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE DOCK VOLUME TV CH AMP TV SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 TV MUTE ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 2 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 7 9 0 +10 PRESET/CH LEVEL CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 8 1 SLEEP ENT SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTERTAIN 2 3 *2 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 4 ENT SET MENU MENU TITLE A-E/CAT. 8 SLEEP +10 PRESET/CH LEVEL ENTER RETURN MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT *2 SRCH MODE BAND DISPLAY ENTER XM MEMORY A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC 1 2 3 4 *1 ADVANCED OPERATION SCENE REC SCENE 1 2 3 4 Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to K AMP. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns the power on or off. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to K TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 86. English 85 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to K SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 87). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 POWER TV AV CD CD-R DVD DTV 1 STANDBY MD POWER MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL CBL XM TUNER DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR PHONO AMP SOURCE VOLUME TV CH TV VOL TV TV MUTE y TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER TV INPUT CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 MUTE ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 6 ENTERTAIN 2 3 MOVIE 4 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 SLEEP +10 PRESET/CH LEVEL 8 ENT SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 7 8 ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY 9 REC SCENE 1 2 3 4 The remote control has 10 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 10 different components. Remote control DVD player/ recorder 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title 5 6 7 8 9 VCR Digital TV/ LD player Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner iPod Preset stations (1-8) Band PRESET/CH Up k VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up PRESET/CH Down n VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down A-E/CAT. l Left Left Preset down (A-E) Previous menu A-E/CAT. h Right Right Preset up (A-E) Subsequent menu ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 e Pause Pause *2 b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Pause Subsequent menu Disc skip Rec Play Play Play Play (Play/pause)*4 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *3 Pause Pause Pause Menu Search forward *3 Pause (Play/pause)*4 Skip backward Previous menu Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 87). *3 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *4 Simple remote mode (see page 58). *2 86 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons (A) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up. MD CD CD-R DVD DTV TUNER XM DVR VCR PHONO Remote control code default settings CBL Input source Component category Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 62000 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 71292 DVD DVD YAMAHA 42000 DTV/CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 82005 XM TUNER YAMAHA 82006 V-AUX OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (iPod) DOCK V-AUX 2 Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the selected input selector button lights up. DVD YAMAHA 82000 DVR YAMAHA 52001 VCR – – – PHONO – – – Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER TRANSMIT Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (B) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 2 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 ADVANCED OPERATION DVR Lights up TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT 8 Flashes y Refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Notes 87 En English • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. • If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control code previously set for the selected input area is cleared. Remote control features Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons (B ) to enter the code number “9981”. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 2 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 TRANSMIT 8 Flashes y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. 88 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE REMOTE Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN ADVANCED OPERATION IN OUT Yamaha component ■ Using the external amplifier Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks Amplifier Main zone Second zone (Zone 2) Infrared signal receiver Remote control DVD player This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jacks From the REMOTE IN jacks English Note To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 89 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit Important safety notice The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2” (see page 72). FRONT B/ZONE2/ PRESENCE EXTRA SP L R Second zone (Zone 2) This unit Main zone y • You can use the FRONT B speakers as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B” and then “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 72). • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 82). Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 50) • Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 53) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 58) ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel Turning on Zone 2 Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. y 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. Once B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press H POWER or G STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Note You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. Press 9 ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ZONE2 Flashes 90 En Using multi-zone configuration Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2 operation mode. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control Operating Zone 2 Turning on Zone 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Press and hold H POWER or G STANDBY and then press A to set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. • Press H POWER when the main zone is turned on. • Press G STANDBY when the main zone is turned off. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 50. • Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite Radio tuning” on page 53. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 58. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. POWER While holding down TRANSMIT or PHONO STANDBY Lights up Set Zone 2 to the standby mode Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. 1 Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER Operating Zone 2 Flashes 2 Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Press H POWER to turn on Zone 2. TRANSMIT TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2 mode Notes • When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, H POWER, G STANDBY, J VOLUME +/–, L MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons remain in the main mode. • The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in the following cases: – when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. – when you press a remote control button other than H POWER, G STANDBY, J VOLUME +/–, L MUTE, and the input selector buttons. Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the code number “9992”. Press one of the input selector buttons (A) to select the desired input source of Zone 2. Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 2 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 TRANSMIT 8 Press G STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. Flashes English 91 En ADVANCED SETUP Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 25). • Only B MASTER ON/OFF, C TONE CONTROL and the D PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using the advanced setup 1 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 93 for a complete list of available parameters. SPIMP.-8MIN Currently selected parameter 92 En Currently selected parameter setting 4 Press C TONE CONTROL repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Advanced setup See page 92 for the operation of the advanced setup. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition. This feature is useful when you operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/ amplifiers in the same room separately. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “00002”. Setting remote control AMP ID codes You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the remote control. 1 If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8Ω MIN Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. TRANSMIT TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER Flashes Surround back Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6Ω MIN 2 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID code is changed. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 2 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 7 ADVANCED OPERATION If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. TRANSMIT 8 Flashes Surround back * AMP ID code *1 The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8Ω MIN”. ■ User presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 103). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Function 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control AMP ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit Notes English • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 93 En Advanced setup ■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 92 for the operation of the advanced setup. ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID code is set to “82005”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID code is set to “81949”. Setting remote control TUNER ID codes You need to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the remote control. 1 Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID code is set to “82006”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID code is set to “82007”. Setting remote control XM ID codes You need to set the remote control XM ID code for the remote control. 1 Press ATUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press A XM to select “XM” as the input source. XM TUNER 2 2 Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Press U CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. POWER TV AV POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER TRANSMIT TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT TRANSMIT CODE SET POWER STANDBY Flashes POWER Flashes 3 3 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the code number “82005” or “81949”. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID code is changed. Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the code number “82006” or “82007”. The V TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the XM ID code is changed. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB 1 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 2 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 TUNER ID code *1 7 TRANSMIT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 *2 94 En 4 7 TRANSMIT 8 Flashes Flashes Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 XM ID code *1 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit Function 82006 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 82007 *1 *2 *1 MOVIE 3 STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 8 82005 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81949 ENTERTAIN 2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. The remote control setting The setting of this unit Remote control XM ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 Advanced setup See page 92 for the operation of the advanced setup. ■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the SCENE mode. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” when the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit automatically sends the remote control signals to the component. • Select “OFF” when the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and does not have the capability of the SCENE control signals. Note If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF”. ■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function (see page 14). Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier function. “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE” automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel audio signals at the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier function. Note When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT B” or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 72). ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. English 95 En TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. No picture. Cause See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 25 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires for each connection do not touch anything other than their respective connections. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use this unit normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-23 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 31 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 39 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 39 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers by pressing 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly. 38 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press L MUTE or J VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 40 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 16 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V661” in “MANUAL SETUP”. 77 The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 81 Non-standard video signals are input. 96 En Remedy 37, 38 Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 25, 93 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn this unit on, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press L MUTE or J VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 40 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 74 No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 73 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 42 The sound field programs are turned off. Press E STRAIGHT to turn them on. 47 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 37 “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting other than “PRESENCE”. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. 72 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 73 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press E STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 47 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 73 “SUR. B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 73 Zone 2 speaker settings are not available in “SET MENU”. “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting other than “ZONE2”. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2”. 72 FRONT B speakers cannot be activated. “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting other than “FRONT B”. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. 72 No sound from the center, surround or surround back speakers when the FRONT B speakers are activated. “FRONT B” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “ZONE B”. Set “FRONT B” to “FRONT”. 72 Presence speaker settings are not available in “SET MENU”. “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting other than “PRESENCE”. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. 72 No sound from the presence speakers. No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. 97 En English When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy See page “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 72 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 72 The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 39 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effects cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effects with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 21 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 82 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the connected HDMI component. The HDMI component does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — 98 En Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 19, 21 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM Remedy See page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. 24 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 50 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 50 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 51 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient the antenna for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 50 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noise can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM Cause English 99 En Troubleshooting ■ XM Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or do not work properly. Check XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock connections and orient for the best reception level. 53 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Mini-Tuner for the best reception level. 53 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing 4 CATEGORY on the front panel (or D A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly. 55 / - - - <CAT> - - - No channels are available for the selected category. ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. See page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 27 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. — The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the K AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the K SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the K TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 87 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 87 The remote control code was not correctly set. The ID code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. 100 En Remedy Cause — Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control ID code. 93 Troubleshooting ■ HDMI Error message Cause Remedy See page DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 23). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 23 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 23 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Unknown iPod ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Connect MIC! Unplug HP! Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 28 Unplug the headphones. — English 101 En Troubleshooting During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 13 E-2:NO SUR SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 13 E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 13 E-4:SBR->SBL Only a right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 13 Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-5:NOISY E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 13 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 28 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 28 Check the speaker connections and placement. 13 E-8:NO SIGNAL E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 28 28 After AUTO SETUP Warning message W-1:OUT OF PHASE Cause Remedy Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 13 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 28 Check the presence speaker connections. 13 Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting other than “PRESENCE”. 72 W-4:CHECK PRNS “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, though the presence channel signals are not detected. Notes • • • • See page If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If a warning message “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If a warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made. If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. 102 En 13 RESETTING THE SYSTEM Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. 1 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to select “PRESET”. 4 Press C TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “RESET”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 y Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. English 103 En GLOSSARY Glossary ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital EX A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. 104 En ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. Glossary ■ DTS 96/24 ■ Neo:6 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ HDMI ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits ■ LFE 0.1 channel With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http:// www.hdmi.org/”. ■ S-video signal English 105 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION Sound field program information ■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 106 En ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION Parametric equalizer information This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 75), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic English Band 2 107 En SPECIFICATIONS Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Volume Control ....................................... MUTE/–80 dB to 16.5 dB • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 90 W • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω ..................................... 120/155/190/235 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ....................................................... 130 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 140 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ....................................................................................... 1.4 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ................................... 100 W • Damping Factor (IHF) Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................................................. 120 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO (MM) ........................................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (MM) 1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............................................. 60 mV or more CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ............................... 2.3 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL) ................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR. B L/R SP: SMALL/SML) ............................................................ 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz ...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (MM) ............................................................. 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO (MM) to OUT (REC) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V ............................................ 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R 2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω ............... 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (MM, 5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K., Europe, Korea and Asia models] .............................................................................. 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R ............................................................................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more 108 En • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ......................................................................... 0.5% • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz Specifications GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ..................................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 380 W/480 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 390 W • Standby Power Consumption ....................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD .................................................................... 800 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, and China models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia, General and Europe models] ...... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] ............... 1 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 393 mm (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in) • Weight .............................................................. 11.6 kg (25 lbs 9 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 109 En ■ Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 2 1 3 4 PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES INPUT STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON A i OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA B S VIDEO C D E F G H I J VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL ■ Remote control U V W CODE SET POWER TV AV A POWER STANDBY H MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL MD CD G TRANSMIT POWER CD-R I CBL DVD DTV TUNER XM DVR VCR PHONO DOCK V-AUX AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV J K P L TV MUTE TV INPUT CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 MUTE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO B STEREO 5 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 6 7 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE D E ENT SET MENU LEVEL ENHANCER STRAIGHT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT M 9 0 N Q R PURE DIRECT 7 8 S T 8 SLEEP 10 PRESET/CH C PURE DIRECT ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY O XM MEMORY REC SCENE F 1 2 3 4 APPENDIX ii INDEX Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 69 2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 69 2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46 2ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46 3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 70 7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46 7ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46 96/24 indicator ..................................... 27 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 81 A)I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ..... 78 A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 72 AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) .......... 24 Action Game, Sound field program ..... 44 Advanced setup .................................... 92 Advanced sound configurations ........... 61 Adventure, Sound field program ......... 45 ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 55 All Channel Search mode, XM tuning ....................................... 55 All remote control codes resetting ....... 88 AM antenna connection ....................... 24 AM tuning ............................................ 50 Amplifier function OSD display time, Display settings ............................... 81 Audio cable plugs ................................ 15 Audio components connection ............. 21 AUDIO DELAY, Audio settings ......... 76 Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 76 Audio information ................................ 41 Audio input jacks selection .................. 39 AUDIO jacks ....................................... 15 Audio jacks .......................................... 15 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 39 Audio select, Option menu .................. 82 Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 76 Audio signal flow ................................. 17 AUTO SETUP ............................... 28, 69 Auto setup ............................................ 69 AUTO: RESULT ................................. 31 Automatic preset tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................. 51 Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 50 Available decoders with Sound field programs .............. 66 ■ B B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 79 B)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .................................... 82 B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu .... 74 Bass cross over, Speaker settings ........ 74 BGV, Multi channel input settings ...... 80 BI-AMP, Advanced setup .................... 95 Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ............. 95 110 En ■ C C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ......82 C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu ..........75 C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .........80 C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............68 Cable plugs ...........................................15 CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................55 CD player connection ...........................21 Cellar Club, Sound field program ........43 CENTER GEQ, Equalizer ....................76 Center graphic equalizer, Equalizer .....76 CENTER PRE OUT jack connection ........................................22 CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............73 Center speaker level, Sound field parameter ......................66 Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........73 CENTER WIDTH, Decoder parameter ...........................68 Chamber, Sound field program ............43 Charge on standby, iPod universal dock setting ..............83 CLASSICAL, Sound field category .....43 CMPNT-V INPUT, Input/output assignment ...................78 COAXIAL IN, Input/output assignment ...................79 COAXIAL INPUT jack assignment, Input/output assignment ...................79 COMPONENT VIDEO jack assignment, Input/output assignment ...................78 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............15 Compressed Music Enhancer ...............46 Compressed Music Enhancer effect level, Sound field parameter ......................66 Connection, AM antenna connection ...24 Connection, audio components ............21 Connection, CD player .........................21 Connection, CENTER PRE OUT jack .................22 Connection, DVD player ......................19 Connection, DVD recorder ..................20 Connection, External amplifier ............22 Connection, external decoder ...............22 Connection, FM antenna ......................24 Connection, FRONT PRE OUT jacks ..................22 Connection, iPod universal dock .........23 Connection, Multi-format player .........22 Connection, Power cable ......................24 Connection, projector ...........................18 Connection, PVR .................................20 Connection, set-top boxes ....................20 Connection, speaker cable ....................14 Connection, SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ........22 Connection, SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks ...........22 Connection, SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ........ 22 Connection, Turntable ......................... 21 Connection, TV monitor ...................... 18 Connection, VCR ................................ 20 CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ......... 74 CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66 Current status display .......................... 39 ■ D D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ..... 80 D)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............ 75 D)PARAM.INI, Option menu ............. 82 Decoder descriptions ........................... 67 Decoder indicators ............................... 26 Decoder mode ...................................... 80 Decoder mode, Input menu ................. 80 Decoder select mode, Decoder mode .. 80 Decoder selection ................................ 66 Decoder type, Extended surround decoders ........... 77 DIALG.LIFT, Sound field parameter ..................... 62 Dialogue left, Sound field parameter ..................... 62 DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 15 DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 15 DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 68 DIMMER, Display settings ................. 81 Dimmer, Display settings .................... 81 Direct number access mode, XM tuning ....................................... 55 DIRECT, Sound field parameter ......... 66 DISPLAY SET .................................... 81 Display settings, Option menu ............ 81 DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 30 DISTANCE, Auto setup parameter ..... 30 DOCK indicator .................................. 26 Drama, Sound field program ............... 45 DSP effect level, Sound field parameter ..................... 62 DSP indicators ..................................... 26 DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..................... 62 DTS decoder prioritize setting, Decoder mode ................................. 80 DTS Neo:6 Music ................................ 68 DVD player connection ....................... 19 DVD recorder connection ................... 20 Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 76 ■ E E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 76 E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 80 E)ZONE2 SET, Option menu ............. 82 ENHANCER indicator ........................ 26 ENTERTAINMENT, Sound field category ....................... 44 EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 75 Index EQ TYPE, Auto setup parameter ......... 29 Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 75 Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 75 EQUALIZING, Auto setup parameter ....................... 30 Extended surround decoders, Sound menu ..................................... 77 External amplifier connection .............. 22 External decoder connection ................ 22 EXTRA SP ASSIGN, Auto setup parameter ....................... 29 EXTRA SP ASSIGN, Speaker settings ............................... 72 Extra speaker assignment, Auto setup parameter ....................... 29 Extra speaker assignment, Speaker settings ............................... 72 ■ F ■ G G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 76 G)DOCK SET, Option menu ............... 83 ■ H I I)EXTD SUR., Sound menu .................77 Infrared window ...................................27 INI VOL., Audio settings .....................77 INI VOL., Zone 2 settings ....................83 INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......63 Initial delay, Sound field parameter .....63 Initial volume, Audio settings ..............77 INPUT CH, Multi channel input settings .............80 Input channel and speaker indicators ...27 Input channel indicators .......................27 Input channels, Multi channel input settings .............80 Input menu, Manual setup ....................69 Input rename, Input menu ....................79 Input signal indicators ..........................26 Input source indicators .........................26 Input source information display .........40 Input/output assignment, Input menu ...78 iPod universal dock connection ...........23 iPod universal dock setting ..................83 iPod universal dock setting, Option menu .....................................83 iPod use ................................................58 ■ J Jacks .....................................................15 ■ L LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............30 LFE indicator .......................................27 LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......74 LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............74 LIVE/CLUB, Sound field category ......43 LIVENESS, Sound field parameter .....64 Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........64 Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu .....................................76 LVL, Auto setup result .........................30 ■ M Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning .................................51 MANUAL SETUP ...............................69 Manual setup ........................................69 Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............50 MASTER ON/OFF ..............................25 MAX VOL., Audio settings .................77 MAX VOL., Zone 2 settings ................82 Maximum volume ................................77 Maximum volume, Audio settings .......77 Memory guard, Option menu ...............82 MODE, Extended surround decoders ............77 Mode, Extended surround decoders .....77 Mono Movie, Sound field program ......45 MOVIE, Sound field category .............45 MULTI CH INPUT component selection .........................38 ■ N Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type ........ 66, 67 Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 67 Neural Sur., Decoder type ................... 67 NIGHT indicator ................................. 26 Night listening mode ........................... 49 Number of speakers, Auto setup result .............................. 30 ■ O Operation mode selector ...................... 27 OPTICAL IN, Input/output assignment .................. 79 OPTICAL INPUT jack assignment, Input/output assignment .................. 79 OPTICAL OUT, Input/output assignment .................. 79 OPTICAL OUTPUT jack assignment, Input/output assignment .................. 79 OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 28 Option menu, Manual setup ................ 70 OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 81 OSD shift, Display settings ................. 81 OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 81 OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 81 Other components controlling by remote control ............................ 86 Other components controlling, Remote control ................................ 86 ■ P P.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ..................... 63 P.ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ..................... 64 PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 68 Parameter initialization, Option menu .................................... 82 Parametric equalizer information ...... 107 Parametric equalizer type, Auto setup parameter ...................... 29 Parametric equalizer, Auto setup parameter ...................... 30 PHONES jack ...................................... 40 PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 67 111 En English H)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................ 77 Hall in Munich, Sound field program ........................ 43 Hall in Vienna, Sound field program ........................ 43 HDMI ................................................... 16 HDMI IN jack assignment, Input/output assignment .................. 79 HDMI IN, Input/output assignment ..... 79 HDMI indicator .................................... 26 HDMI setting, Sound menu ................. 77 HEADPHONE ..................................... 76 Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 76 HEADPHONE, Low-frequency effect level .............. 76 Headphone, Low-frequency effect level .............. 76 ■ MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 22 Multi channel input settings, Input menu ....................................... 80 Multi-channel source playback in 2-channel stereo .......................... 49 Multi-channel source playback with headphones .............................. 46 Multi-format player connection ........... 22 Multi-information display ................... 27 MULTI-ZONE Configuration ............. 89 MUSIC ENHANCER, Sound field category ........................ 46 Music Video, Sound field program ..... 44 MUTE .................................................. 40 MUTE indicator ................................... 26 Muting ................................................. 40 MUTING TYPE, Audio settings ......... 76 Muting type, Audio settings ................ 76 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION F)DYNAMIC RANGE, Sound menu ..................................... 76 F)XM RADIO SET, Option menu ....... 83 FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 81 FM antenna .......................................... 24 FM antenna connection ........................ 24 FM tuning ............................................ 50 FRONT B speaker setting, Speaker settings ............................... 72 FRONT B speakers setting .................. 72 FRONT B, Speaker settings ................. 72 Front input, Multi channel input settings ............ 80 Front panel display ............................... 26 Front panel display scroll, Display settings ................................ 81 FRONT PRE OUT jack connection ..... 22 FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 73 Front speaker set selection ................... 38 Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 73 FRONT, Multi channel input settings ............ 80 Headphones ..........................................40 Headphones indicator ...........................26 HP, Dynamic range ..............................76 Index PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 67 PL II Music, Decoder type ................... 67 PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ...... 66 Playing video sources in the background ............................ 40 PLII Movie, Decoder type ................... 66 PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 67 PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 66, 67 PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 67 Power cable connection ....................... 24 PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66 Presence and surround back speaker indicators ......................................... 27 Presence left speaker level, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 Presence right speaker level, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 Presence sound field initial delay, Sound field parameter ...................... 63 Presence sound field room size, Sound field parameter ...................... 64 Presence/Surround back channel priority, Speaker settings ............................... 72 Preset channel setting, XM tuning ....... 56 Preset SCENE templates ...................... 35 Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 55 PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning .......... 55 Preset station selection, FM/AM tuning ................................. 52 Preset stations exchange, FM/AM tuning ................................. 52 PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 93 PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 72 PRO LOGIC II Music .......................... 68 PRO LOGIC IIx Music ........................ 68 PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ........... 66, 67 Projector connection ............................ 18 Pure Direct ........................................... 48 Pure hi-fi sound .................................... 48 PVR connection ................................... 20 ■ R Rear panel ............................................ 11 REMOTE AMP, Advanced setup ........ 93 Remote control AMP ID, Advanced setup ............................... 93 Remote control code default settings ... 87 Remote control codes .............................. i Remote control codes setting ............... 87 Remote control TUNER ID, Advanced setup ............................... 94 Remote control XM ID, Advanced setup ............................... 94 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 23 REMOTE TUN, Advanced setup ........ 94 REMOTE XM, Advanced setup .......... 94 Rename, SCENE template ................... 36 Repeat .................................................. 59 Repeat, iPod playback .......................... 59 Resetting the system .......................... 103 REV.DELAY, Sound field parameter ...................... 65 REV.LEVEL, Sound field parameter ...................... 65 112 En REV.TIME, Sound field parameter ......................65 Reverberation delay, Sound field parameter ......................65 Reverberation level, Sound field parameter ......................65 Reverberation time, Sound field parameter ......................65 Roleplaying Game, Sound field program ........................44 ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ......................64 Room size, Sound field parameter .......64 ■ S S VIDEO jacks .....................................15 S.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ......................63 S.LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ......................64 S.ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ......................64 SB INI.DLY, Sound field parameter ......................63 SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ................73 SB LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......................66 SB LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ......................64 SB ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ......................64 SCENE 1 ................................................9 SCENE 2 ................................................9 SCENE 3 ................................................9 SCENE 4 ................................................9 SCENE IR code setting, Advanced setup ................................95 SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................95 SCENE template rename .....................36 Sci-Fi, Sound field program .................45 Selection, Audio input jacks ................39 Selection, Front speaker set .................38 Selection, MULTI CH INPUT component .......38 Selection, SCENE template .................33 SET MENU usage ................................71 Set-top box connection .........................20 Shuffle, iPod playback .........................59 SILENT CINEMA ...............................46 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................26 SIZE, Auto setup parameter .................30 SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......66 SLEEP indicator ...................................27 Sleep timer ...........................................41 Sound field indicators ..........................26 Sound field programs ...........................42 Sound field programs with headphones ..............................46 Sound field programs without surround speakers ...............46 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ...........72 Sound menu, Manual setup ..................69 Source feature OSD display time, Display settings ................................81 SP A B indicators ................................ 26 SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 93 SP, Auto setup result ........................... 30 SP, Dynamic range .............................. 76 Speaker cable connection .................... 14 Speaker distance, Auto setup parameter ...................... 30 Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 30 Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 75 Speaker distances ................................ 75 Speaker impedance setting .................. 25 Speaker impedance, Advanced setup ............................... 93 Speaker level adjustment ..................... 48 Speaker level, Auto setup parameter ...................... 30 Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 30 Speaker level, Sound menu ................. 74 Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 72 Speaker size, Auto setup parameter .... 30 Speaker wiring, Auto setup parameter ...................... 30 Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 76 SPEAKER, Low-frequency effect level ............. 76 Speaker, Low-frequency effect level ... 76 Specifications .................................... 108 Spectacle, Sound field program ........... 45 Sports, Sound field program ................ 44 SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66 Standard, Sound field program ............ 45 STANDBY CHARGE, iPod universal dock setting ............. 83 Standby mode, Main zone ................... 25 Standby mode, Zone 2 ......................... 91 STEREO, Sound field category ........... 46 STRAIGHT ......................................... 47 STRAIGHT mode ............................... 47 SUBWOOFER PHASE, Speaker settings ............................... 74 Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ..... 74 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack connection ....................................... 22 Supplied accessories .............................. 3 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setting ..... 77 Support audio, HDMI setting .............. 77 SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ........... 73 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack connection ....................................... 22 Surround back left/right speakers, Speaker settings ............................... 73 Surround back sound field initial delay, Sound field parameter ..................... 63 Surround back sound field liveness, Sound field parameter ..................... 64 Surround back sound field room size, Sound field parameter ..................... 64 Surround back speaker level, Sound field parameter ..................... 66 Surround decode mode ........................ 66 SURROUND DECODE, Decoder category ............................ 67 Surround left speaker level, Sound field parameter ..................... 66 Index Surround left/right speakers, Speaker settings ............................... 73 SURROUND PRE OUT jack connection ........................................ 22 Surround right speaker level, Sound field parameter ...................... 66 Surround sound field initial delay, Sound field parameter ...................... 63 Surround sound field liveness, Sound field parameter ...................... 64 Surround sound field room size, Sound field parameter ...................... 64 ■ T Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 75 TEST, Equalizer ................................... 75 The Bottom Line, Sound field program ........................ 43 The Roxy Theatre, Sound field program ........................ 43 Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 48 TRANSMIT indicator .......................... 27 Troubleshooting ................................... 96 TU, Advanced setup ............................ 95 Tuner frequency step, Advanced setup ................................ 95 Tuner indicators ...................................26 Turning off ...........................................25 Turning on ............................................25 Turntable connection ............................21 TV Controlling, remote control ............85 TV monitor connection ........................18 TYPE, Extended surround decoders ............77 ■ U UNIT, Speaker distance .......................75 Unit, Speaker distance ..........................75 Unprocessed input sources ...................47 User presets, Advanced setup ..............93 ■ V VCR connection ...................................20 VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................23 VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........81 Video conversion, Display settings ......81 Video information ................................41 VIDEO jacks ........................................15 Video jacks ...........................................15 Video signal flow .................................17 Video sources in the background .........40 Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................46 VIRTUAL indicator .............................26 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................4 Volume level ........................................30 VOLUME level indicator .....................26 Volume Trim, Input menu ....................80 ■ W WIRING, Auto setup parameter .......... 30 ■ X XM ANTENNA, XM Radio setting .... 83 XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................... 53 XM Radio antenna, XM Radio setting ............................ 83 XM Radio setting, Option menu ......... 83 XM satellite radio activation ............... 54 XM Satellite Radio display ................. 57 XM satellite radio tuning ..................... 53 ■ Y YPAO indicator ................................... 26 ■ Z Zone 2 .................................................. 89 Zone 2 Initial volume, Zone 2 settings ................................ 83 Zone 2 Maximum volume, Zone 2 settings ................................ 82 Zone 2 settings, Option menu .............. 82 Zone B ................................................. 38 ZONE2 indicator ................................. 26 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION About this manual 113 En English • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). List of remote control codes CABLE TV RECEIVER 3M A-MARK ABC 10033 10008, 10144 10237, 10003, 10008, 10033 ACCUPHASE 10003 ACORN 10237 ACTION 10237 ACTIVE 10237 AMERICAST 10899 ARCHER 10237 BCC 10276 BELL SOUTH 10899 BRITISH TELECOM 10003 CENTURY 10008 DIRECTOR 10476 DX ANTENNA 11500 FOSGATE 10276 FUJITSU 11497 GE 10144 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10476, 10810, 10276, 10003 GIBRALTER 10003 GOLDSTAR 10144 HITACHI 10003, 10008, 10033 INSIGHT 10476, 10810 JERROLD 10476, 10810, 10276, 10003 MACOM 10033 MEMOREX 10000 MITSUBISHI 10003 MOTOROLA 11376, 10476, 10810, 10276 NEC 11496 NOVA VISION 10008 NOVAPLEX 10008 PACE 11877, 10877, 10237, 10008 PANASONIC 10000, 10008, 10144, 10107, 10375, 11488 PARAGON 10000, 10008, 10525 PENNEY 10000 PHILIPS 11305, 10317 PIONEER 11877, 10877, 10144, 10533, 11021, 11500, 11782 PULSAR 10000 QUASAR 10000 REGAL 10276 RUNCO 10000 SAMSUNG 10003, 10144 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 11877, 10877, 10477, 10237, 10003, 10000, 10008 SONY 11006, 11460 SPRUCER 10144 STARCOM 10003 SUMITOMO 11500, 11503 SUPERCABLE 10276 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 10000, 11509 iii UNITED CABLE 10276, 10003 US ELECTRONICS 10276, 10003, 10008 VIDEOWAY 10000 ZENITH 10000, 10525, 10899 CABLE/PVR COMBINATION AMERICAST 10899 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10810 JERROLD 10810 MOTOROLA 11376, 10810 PACE 11877, 10237 PIONEER 11877, 10877 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 11877, 10877 SONY 11006 SUPERCABLE 10276 ZENITH 10899 DBS/PVR COMBINATION DIRECTV 11377, 10392, 10639, 11142, 11392, 11442, 11640 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 11505, 10775 DISHPRO 11505, 10775 ECHOSTAR 11505, 10775 EXPRESSVU 10775 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 11142, 11442 PHILIPS 11142, 11442 PROSCAN 10392 RCA 11392 SAMSUNG 11442 SHARP 11489 SONY 10639, 11640 SATELLITE RECEIVER AIWA 11514, 11515 ALPHASTAR 10772 AUSTAR 10879 BELL EXPRESSVU 10775 CHAPARRAL 10216 DIRECTV 11377, 10392, 10566, 10639, 11639, 11142, 10247, 10749, 11749, 10724, 10819, 11856, 11392, 11442, 11640 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 11505, 11005, 10775, 11775 DISHPRO 11505, 11005, 10775, 11775 DX ANTENNA 11530 ECHOSTAR 11505, 11005, 10775, 11775 ESAT EXPRESSVU FOXTEL FUNAI GE GOI HITACHI 10879 10775, 11775 10879, 11356 11377 10392, 10566 10775, 11775 10749, 10819, 10214, 11250, 11518, 11523, 11525 HOUSTON 10775 HTS 10775, 11775 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 11142, 10749, 11749, 11442 JVC 10775, 10492, 11507, 11531, 11532, 11775 LG 11226 MAGNAVOX 10724, 10722 MASPRO 11520, 11530 MATSUSHITA 10214 MEMOREX 10724 MITSUBISHI 10749 MOTOROLA 10856 NEC 10496, 11270, 11519 OPTIMUS 10724 PACE 11356 PANASAT 10879 PANASONIC 10247, 10701, 10214, 11508, 11526, 11527, 11528 PAYSAT 10724 PHILIPS 11142, 10749, 11749, 10775, 10724, 10819, 10722, 11442 PIONEER 11142, 11442 PROSCAN 10392, 10566 RADIOSHACK 10566, 10775 RCA 10392, 10566, 11142, 10775, 10855, 10143, 11392, 11442 SAMSUNG 11377, 11142, 11276, 11442 SANYO 11219 SHARP 10494, 11489, 11513, 11517 SKY 10856 SONY 10639, 11639, 10163, 10275, 10294, 11524, 11640 STAR TRAK 10772 THOMSON 10392, 10566 TIVO 11142, 11442 TOSHIBA 10749, 11749, 10790, 10819, 10486, 11285, 11501, 11516, 11530 UEC 11356 ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640 UNIDEN 10724, 10722 ZENITH 10856, 11856 TV A-MARK 20047, 20054, 20160 ACCUSCAN 20047 ACTION 20030 ADMIRAL 20017, 20047, 20051, 20054, 20093, 20179, 20180, 20264, 20463 ADVENT 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817, 20842 ADVENTURI 20000 AGNA 20150 AIKO 20092 AIWA 21180 AKAI 20030, 20060, 20145, 20672, 20702, 20812 ALARON 20170, 20179 ALBA 20037 ALBATRON 20700, 20843 ALFIDE 20672 ALLERON 20030, 20170 AMBASSADOR 20150 AMERICA ACTION 20180 AMERICAN HIGH 20000, 20060 AMSTRAD 20171 AMTRON 20000, 20180 ANAM 20180 ANAM NATIONAL 20161 AOC 20030, 20180 APEX DIGITAL20156, 20748, 20765, 20767, 20879 AUDINAC 20180 AUDIOVOX 20092, 20179, 20180, 20451, 20623, 20802, 20875 AVENTURA 20171 BAYCREST 20186 BAYSONIC 20180 BEAUMARK 20017, 20030, 20178, 20179 BELCOR 20030 BELL & HOWELL 20054, 20093, 20154, 20179 BENQ 21032 BRADFORD 20180 BROCKWOOD 20030, 20178 BROKSONIC 20180, 20236, 20463 BROTHER 20264 BYD:SIGN 21309, 21311, 21485, 21486 CANDLE 20030, 20186 CAPEHART 20017, 20030, 20036, 20092, 20178 CARNIVALE 20030 EMERSON 20036, 20047, 20150, 20154, 20170, 20171, 20178, 20179, 20180, 20236, 20451, 20463, 20623 ENVISION 20030 ESA 20171, 20812 FISHER 20000, 20054, 20154 FORTRESS 20093 FUJITSU 20179, 20186, 20683, 20809, 20853, 21181, 21607 FUJITSU GENERAL 20186 FUNAI 20000, 20171, 20179, 20180, 20264, 20342 FUTURETECH 20180 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GE 20000, 20030, 20047, 20051, 20060, 20178, 20451, 21147, 21347, 21447 GEMINI 20047 GENERAL 20186 GIBRALTER 20000, 20017, 20030 GOLDSTAR 20030, 20036, 20037, 20047, 20054, 20178, 21378 GOODMANS 20037 GPX 20179 GRADIENTE 20053, 20170 GRAN PRIX 20179 GRANADA 20037 GRUNDIG 20037, 20672, 20683, 20706 GRUNDY 20179, 20180 GRUNPY 20179, 20180 HAIER 21034 HALLMARK 20178, 20179, 20180, 20236 HARLEY DAVIDSON 20000, 20030, 20060, 20178, 20179, 20180 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARVARD 20180 HAVERMY 20093 HEATHKIT 20017 HELIOS 20865 HELLO KITTY 20451 HISENSE 20748 HITACHI 20000, 20017, 20036, 20047, 20051, 20054, 20145, 20178, 20179, 21145, 21150, 21245, 21378 HYUNDAI 20849, 20865 ICE 20264 IMA 20178, 20179, 20180, 20236 INFINITY 20054 INNOVA 20037 INSIGNIA 20171 INTEQ JBL JCB JENSEN JIL JINXING JUTAN JVC KAMP KAWASHO KEC KENWOOD KLH KLOSS KONKA KTV LARK LG LLOYD'S LOGIK LUMATRON LXI MACY MAGNASONIC 20017, 20145 20054 20000 20761, 20815, 20817 20030 20037 20030 20030, 20036, 20053, 20054, 20160, 20653, 20731, 21172, 21253, 21428 20017, 20180 20030 20060, 20180 20030, 20180 20156, 20180, 20765, 20767 20030 20180 20030, 20180, 20463 20154 20030, 20054, 20060, 20178, 20442, 20700, 20856, 21178, 21265, 21378 20030, 20179, 20180, 20236 20179, 20180, 20236 20037, 20264 20179, 20178, 20171, 20166, 20156, 20154, 20093, 20060, 20054, 20053, 20051, 20047, 20037, 20036, 20030, 20017, 20000 20186 20000, 20030, 20054, 20092, 20093, 20156, 20179 MAGNAVOX 21755, 21454, 21254, 20802, 20706, 20250, 20186, 20180, 20179, 20171, 20154, 20092, 20060, 20054, 20051, 20047, 20037, 20036, 20030, 20000 MAJESTIC 20017 MARANTZ 20030, 20037, 20054, 20704, 21454 MARK 20037 MATSUI 20036, 20037 MATSUSHITA 20051, 20161, 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755, 21756 MEGAPOWER 20700 MEGATRON 20047, 20145, 20178 MEMOREX 20030, 20037, 20150, 20154, 20178, 20179, 20180, 20463 MERMAID MGA 20037 20030, 20150, 20178 MGN TECHNOLOGY 20178 MICRO GENIUS 20150 MIDLAND 20017, 20047, 20051 MINATO 20037 MITSUBISHI 20030, 20036, 20093, 20150, 20154, 20160, 20178, 20250, 20836, 21150, 21171, 21182, 21250, 21522 MONIVISION 20700, 20843 MOTOROLA 20051, 20054, 20093, 20150 MTC 20030, 20060, 20092, 20180 MULTITECH 20179, 20180 NAD 20156, 20166, 20178, 20866 NEC 20030, 20036, 20047, 20156, 20170, 20178, 20474, 20704, 21182, 21456, 21704 NETTV 21755 NIKKO 20030, 20092, 20178 NIKKODO 20030, 20092, 20178 NISHI 20030 NORCENT 20748, 20824 NTC 20092 NYON 20000 ONWA 20180 OPTIMUS 20030, 20093, 20150, 20154, 20166, 20178, 20180, 20250, 20650 OPTONICA 20093 ORION 20017, 20178, 20179, 20180, 20236, 20463, 21463 PACE 20092 PACIFIC 20037 PALSONIC 20264 PANASONIC 20000, 20030, 20051, 20054, 20156, 20161, 20236, 20250, 20650, 21168, 21175, 21177 PANDA 20706 PAUSA 20179 PAXONIC 20030, 20060 PCE 20060, 20156, 20179 PENNEY 20000, 20030, 20036, 20037, 20047, 20051, 20060, 20156, 20161, 20178, 20250, 21347, 21378 PHILCO 20030, 20054, 20145, 20179, 20186, 20463 APPENDIX CARVER 20054, 20170 CCE 20037 CELEBRITY 20000 CELERA 20765 CHANGHONG 20156, 20765, 20767, 20783 CINERAL 20092, 20451 CITEK 20047 CITIZEN 20000, 20030, 20054, 20060, 20092, 20171, 20180, 20186, 20451, 20463 CLARION 20180 CLASSIC 20030, 20092 COLORTYME 20017, 20030, 20047, 20054, 20060, 20178 COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS 20047, 21447 CONIC 20178 CONTEC 20180 CRAIG 20161, 20171, 20179, 20180 CROSLEY 20000, 20030, 20054, 20171, 20180 CROWN 20093, 20180, 20672 CROWN MUSTANG 20672 CURTIS MATHES 21347, 21147, 20702, 20451, 20180, 20179, 20178, 20166, 20154, 20145, 20093, 20060, 20054, 20051, 20047, 20037, 20030, 20000 CXC 20180 DAEWOO 20036, 20092, 20178, 20264, 20451, 20623, 20661, 20672, 21661, 21755, 21756 DAYTON 20092 DAYTRON 20030, 20036, 20092, 20178 DELL 21178 DENON 20145, 20511 DUMONT 20017, 20178, 20180 DURABRAND 20171, 20178, 20180, 20463, 21034 DWIN 20093 EATON 20060 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 ELECTROHOME 20000, 20030, 20150, 20154, 20178 EMERALD 20178 iv PHILIPS 20030, 20037, 20054, 20171, 20186, 20690, 21254, 21454, 21455 PILOT 20030, 20051, 20060, 20178 PIONEER 20166, 20679, 20866, 21260 POLAROID 20765, 20865 PORTLAND 20092, 20451 PRECISION 20180, 20236 PRIMA 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817 PRINCETON 20700 PRISM 20051, 20250 PROSCAN 20047, 21347, 21447 PROTEC 20037, 20264 PROTON 20178 PROVISION 20037 PULSAR 20017, 20092 PULSER 20092, 20178 QUARTZ 20150, 20178 QUASAR 20051, 20250, 20650 R-LINE 20037 RABBIT 20047 RADIOSHACK 20030, 20047, 20150, 20154, 20178, 20180 RCA 20000, 20047, 20051, 20054, 20090, 20093, 20178, 20679, 21047, 21147, 21247, 21347, 21447, 21547 REALISTIC 20030, 20047, 20150, 20154, 20178, 20180 REVOX 20037 RUNCO 20017, 20030, 20060 SAMPO 20030, 20047, 21755, 21756 SAMSUNG 20017, 20030, 20036, 20037, 20047, 20054, 20060, 20154, 20178, 20264, 20587, 20702, 20766, 20812, 20814, 21060 SANKY 20030, 20060 SANSUI 20030, 20060, 20463 SANYO 20000, 20036, 20037, 20047, 20054, 20088, 20154, 20171, 20376, 20424, 20463, 21179, 21755 SAVILLE 20060 SCOTCH 20178 SCOTT 20030, 20178, 20179, 20180, 20236 v SEARS 20179, 20178, 20171, 20166, 20156, 20154, 20093, 20060, 20054, 20053, 20051, 20047, 20037, 20036, 20030, 20017, 20000 SHARP 20036, 20054, 20093, 20179, 20180, 20256, 20787, 21165 SHENG CHIA 20093 SHIVAKI 20037, 20178 SIEMENS 20145 SIGNATURE 20030, 20047, 20093, 20179 SIMPSON 20030, 20178, 20186 SINGER 20060, 20092 SKY-NORTH 20037 SOLAR DRAPE 20000 SONY 20000, 20017, 20036, 20053, 20150, 20154, 21100, 21167, 21300, 21651 SOUNDESIGN 20178, 20179, 20180, 20186 SPECTRAVISION 20156, 20178, 20179, 20186 SQUAREVIEW 20171 SR2000 20154, 20171 SSS 20180 STARLITE 20180, 20236 STUDIO EXPERIENCE 20843 SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864 SUPRE-MACY 20186 SUPREME 20000 SV2000 20054 SVA 20587, 20748, 20865, 20870, 20871 SYLVANIA 20000, 20030, 20036, 20037, 20047, 20051, 20054, 20092, 20154, 20171, 20178, 20179, 20186 SYMPHONIC 20000, 20171, 20178, 20179, 20180 TANDY 20093 TATUNG 20000, 20037, 20051, 21756 TEAC 20037, 20154, 20264, 20706 TECHNICS 20051, 20054, 20250 TECHNOL ACE 20179 TECHNOVOX 20030 TECHWOOD 20051, 20060, 20250 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060, 20092, 20150, 20178, 20179, 20180, 20186, 20463 TELECOLOR 20017 TELEFUNKEN 20702 TELETON 20186 TEVION 20037 THOMAS 20047, 20178 THOMSON 20047, 21447 TMK 20178, 20180, 20236 TNCI 20017 TOCOM 20156 TOSHIBA 21704, 21656, 21456, 21356, 21265, 21256, 21173, 21169, 21156, 21145, 20845, 20650, 20509, 20264, 20166, 20156, 20154, 20150, 20145, 20060, 20036 TOTEVISION 20051 TOYOMENKA 20178 TRUETONE 20051, 20250 TVS 20463 ULTRA 20092 UNIVERSAL 20047 UNIVERSUM 20036, 20037, 20170, 20264, 20474 V 20864, 20885, 21755, 21756 VECTOR RESEARCH 20030 VICTOR 20036, 20053, 20160, 20653 VIDIKRON 20054 VIDTECH 20036, 20178 VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864, 20885, 21755 VIKING 20060 VISIO 20864, 20885, 21755, 21756 VIZIO 20864, 20885, 21756 WARDS 20000, 20017, 20030, 20037, 20047, 20051, 20054, 20093, 20154, 20166, 20178, 20179, 20186, 20236, 20866, 21156 WAYCON 20156 WELTON 20178 WESTINGHOUSE 20000, 20451, 20885, 20889 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20179, 20236, 20451, 20463, 20623, 20889 WORLD 20180, 20236, 20451, 20463 XR-1000 YAMAHA YORX ZENITH 20154, 20171, 20179, 20180 20030, 20650, 20769, 21405, 21406, 21407, 21522 20030 20000, 20017, 20030, 20037, 20047, 20092, 20093, 20145, 20160, 20171, 20178, 20463, 20812, 21145, 21265 PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER 31972 DELL 31972 DIRECTV 30739 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HITACHI 31718 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30739 HUMAX 30739 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JVC 31279 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MITSUBISHI 31714 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 30616, 31244, 31732, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 30618, 30739 PIONEER 31803 RCA 30880 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 SAMSUNG 30739 SHARP 31742, 31810 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30636, 31447, 31448, 31636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739 TOSHIBA 30828, 31008, 31739, 31972, 31996 TOUCH 31972 VICTOR 31706 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR A-MARK LXI 30037, 30000, 30042, 30067 M ELECTRONIC 30240 MAGNASONIC 30037, 30240, 30000, 31278 MAGNAVOX 30035, 30037, 30048, 30039, 30081, 30240, 30000, 30226, 30618, 31781 MAGNIN 30240 MARANTZ 30035, 30081, 30038, 31381 MARTA 30037 MATSUI 30037, 30209, 30348 MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162, 30081, 30226 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEDION 30348 MEI 30035 MEMOREX 30035, 30162, 30037, 30048, 30039, 30047, 30240, 30000, 30104, 30209, 30307, 30348, 31237 METZ 30037 MGA 30060, 30240, 30043 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICROSOFT 31972 MIDLAND 30240 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30060, 30048, 30047, 30000, 30042, 30067, 30043, 30041, 30807, 31343, 31714 MOTOROLA 30035, 30048 MTC 30240, 30000 MTX 30000 MULTITECH 30039, 30000 NAD 30240, 30104 NEC 30104, 30067, 30041, 30038 NIKKO 30037 NIKKODO 30037 NIKON 30034 NISHI 30240 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NORTHGATE 31972 OLYMPUS 30035, 30162, 30104, 30226 OPTIMUS 31062, 30035, 30162, 30037, 30048, 30047, 30240, 30000, 30104 ORION 30184, 30240, 30000, 30104, 30121, 30209, 31479 PANAMA 30035 PANASONIC 31062, 30035, 30162, 30000, 30225, 30226, 30614, 30616, 31035, 31244, 31292, 31308, 31732, 31807, 31808, 31809 PENNEY 30035, 30162, 30037, 30047, 30081, 30240, 30000, 30042, 30067, 30038, 31035, 31237 PENTAX 30042 PHILCO 30035, 30081, 30000, 30209 PHILIPS 30035, 30162, 30048, 30081, 30045, 30000, 30209, 30034, 30616, 30618, 30739, 31381 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30162, 30081, 30042, 30067, 31803 POLK AUDIO 30081 PROFITRONIC 30240 PROSCAN 30060, 31060 PROTEC 30000 PULSAR 30039, 30240 PULSER 30240 QUARTZ 30035, 30047 QUASAR 30035, 30162, 30226, 31035 RADIOSHACK 30035, 30162, 30037, 30048, 30047, 30240, 30000, 30104 RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RCA 30060, 30035, 30048, 30240, 30045, 30000, 30042, 30166, 30807, 30880, 31035, 31060 REALISTIC 30035, 30162, 30037, 30048, 30047, 30240, 30000, 30104, 30121 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 RICAVISION 31972 RICOH 30034 RUNCO 30039 SAMSUNG 30060, 30240, 30045, 30000, 30038, 30739, 31014 SAMTRON 30240 SANKY 30048, 30039 SANSUI 30240, 30000, 30067, 30209, 30041, 31479 SANYO 30047, 30240, 30000, 30104, 31330, 31331 SCOTT 30184, 30045, 30121, 30043 APPENDIX 30037, 30240, 30000 ABS 31972 ADMIRAL 30060, 30048, 30039, 30047, 30104, 30209 ADVENTURA 30037, 30240, 30000 AIWA 30037, 30000, 30307, 30348, 31284, 31291, 31332, 31336 AKAI 30041 ALBA 30209 ALIENWARE 31972 ALLEGRO 30039 AMERICAN HIGH 30035, 30081 AMSTRAD 30000 ANAM NATIONAL 30226 ASHA 30240 ASTRA 30035, 30240 AUDIOVOX 30037, 30038 AVIS 30000 BEAUMARK 30240 BELL & HOWELL 30035, 30048, 30039, 30000, 30104 BROKSONIC 30184, 30121, 30209, 30348, 31479 CALIX 30037 CANDLE 30037, 30038 CANON 30035, 30034 CARRERA 30240 CARVER 30035, 30081 CITIZEN 30035, 30037, 30240, 30000, 30209, 31278 CLASSIC 30037 COLORTYME 30060, 30035, 30045 COLT 30000 CRAIG 30037, 30047, 30240 CRITERION 30000 CROSLEY 30035, 30081, 30000 CURTIS MATHES 30060, 30035, 30162, 30240, 30000, 30041, 31035 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER 31972 DAEWOO 30037, 30045, 31278 DAYTRON 30037 DELL 31972 DENON 30081, 30042 DERWENT 30041 DIRECTV 30739 DUAL 30000 DURABRAND 30039, 30038 DYNATECH 30240, 30000 ELECTROHOME 30060, 30037, 30240, 30000, 30043, 30209 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 EMERALD 30184, 30121 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30037, 30184, 30240, 30000, 30121, 30043, 30209, 30348, 31278, 31479 FISHER 30039, 30047, 30000, 30104 FUJI 30035, 30033 FUJITSU 30045, 30000 FUNAI 30037, 30000, 31333 GARRARD 30000 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30060, 30035, 30048, 30240, 30000, 30807, 31035, 31060 GEMINI 30060 GENERAL 30045 GENEXXA 30037, 30000 GO VIDEO 30240, 30614 GOLDSTAR 30035, 30037, 30039, 30000, 30038, 31237 GOODMANS 30037, 30081, 30000 GRADIENTE 30000 GRANADA 30081, 30042 GRUNDIG 30081, 30034, 30226 HARLEY DAVIDSON 30000 HARMAN/KARDON 30081, 30038 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HI-Q 30035, 30047, 30000 HITACHI 30035, 30037, 30045, 30000, 30042, 30041, 30166, 31286, 31326, 31718 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042, 30739 HUMAX 30739 HUSH 31972 HYTEK 30047, 30000 IBUYPOWER 31972 ITT NOKIA 30240, 30041 JANEIL 30240 JENSEN 30067, 30041 JVC 30067, 30041, 31279, 31299, 31329 KEC 30037 KENWOOD 30067, 30041, 30038 KODAK 30035, 30037 KTV 30000 LG 30037, 30240, 30038 LIFETEC 30348 LINKSYS 31972 LLOYD'S 30240, 30000, 30038 LOEWE 30081 LOGIK 30240, 30000 vi SEARS 30060, 30035, 30162, 30037, 30048, 30039, 30047, 30033, 30045, 30000, 30042, 30104, 30067, 30043, 30209, 30041, 30034, 31237 SHARP 30048, 30047, 30032, 30000, 30807, 31285, 31742, 31810 SHINTOM 30039, 30240, 30000 SHOGUN 30240 SIEMENS 30037, 30104 SIGNATURE 30060, 30035, 30037, 30048, 30000 SINGER 30037, 30240 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30035, 30047, 30032, 30033, 30000, 30067, 30034, 30226, 30636, 31232, 31295, 31296, 31447, 31448, 31636, 31972 SOUNDMASTER 30000 STACK 9 31972 STS 30042 SV2000 30000 SVA 30000 SYLVANIA 30035, 30081, 30000, 30043, 31781 SYMPHONIC 30240, 30000 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TANDY 30000, 30104 TATUNG 30048, 30081, 30000, 30067, 30041 TEAC 30000, 30067, 30041 TECHNICS 30035, 30162, 30037, 30000 TEKNIKA 30035, 30037, 30000 TELECORDER 30240 TELEFUNKEN 30041 THOMAS 30000 THOMSON 30060, 30041 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739, 31996 TMK 30240, 30000 TNIX 30037 TOCOM 30240 TOSHIBA 30240, 30045, 30000, 30042, 30043, 30209, 30041, 30828, 30845, 31008, 31145, 31323, 31739, 31972, 31996 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 TRIX 30037 ULTRA 30045 UNITECH 30240 vii VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30184, 30038 VICTOR 30067, 30041, 31299, 31706 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240, 30000 VIEWSONIC 31972 VILLAIN 30000 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30060, 30035, 30037, 30048, 30047, 30081, 30033, 30240, 30045, 30000, 30042, 30043, 30041, 30038 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30000, 30209 WORLD 30209 XR-1000 30035, 30240, 30000 YAMAHA 30041, 30038 ZENITH 30037, 30039, 30033, 30000, 30209, 30041, 30034, 31479 ZT GROUP 31972 DVD PLAYER 3D LAB ACCURIAN ADVENT AIWA AKAI 40503, 40539 41416 41016 40641 40695, 40705, 40770, 40899 ALBA 40672, 40717 ALCO 40790 ALLEGRO 40869 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMW 40872 APEX DIGITAL 40533, 40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796, 40797, 40830, 41004, 41020, 41056, 41061, 41100 ARRGO 41023 ASPIRE DIGITAL 41168 AUDIOVOX 40717, 40790 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BLAUPUNKT 40717 BLUE PARADE40571 BLUE SKY 40695 BRANDT 40651 BROKSONIC 40695 BYD:SIGN 40872 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 40490 CELESTIAL 41020 CENTREX 40672, 41004 CINEA 40831 CINEVISION 40876, 40869 CITIZEN 41003, 41277 CLAIRTONE 40571 COBY 40778, 41086, 41107 CRAIG 40831 CREATIVE 40503, 40539 CURTIS MATHES 41087 CYBERHOME 40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117, 41129 CYTRON 40705 DAEWOO 40784, 40705, 40770, 40869, 41169, 41172 DANSAI 40770 DAYTEK 40872 DECCA 40770 DENON 40490, 40634, 41282, 41634 DENVER 40778 DIGITREX 40672 DISNEY 40675, 41270 DIVIDO 40705 DUAL 40675 DURABRAND 41127 DVD2000 40521 ELECTROHOME 41003 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40821, 41268 ENTERPRISE 40591 ENTIVO 40503, 40539 ENZER 40770 ESA 40821, 41268 FIRSTLINE 40651 FISHER 40670 FUNAI 40675, 41268 GATEWAY 41158 GE 40522, 40815, 40717 GO VIDEO 40573, 40744, 40717, 40741, 40783, 40869, 41044, 41075, 41099, 41158, 41304, 41730 GOLDSTAR 40741, 40801, 40869 GOODMANS 40790 GRADIENTE 40490, 40651 GREENHILL 40717 GRUNDIG 40539, 40705 HARMAN/KARDON 40582, 40702 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 41247, 41664, 41764 HITEKER 40672 I-O DATA 41405 ILO 41348 INITIAL 40717 INSIGNIA 41268 INTEGRA 40571, 40627, 41634 IRT 40783 JBL 40702 JENSEN 41016 JMB 40695 JVC 40558, 40623, 40867, 41164, 41241, 41275, 41590, 41592, 41594 KAWASAKI 40790 KENWOOD 40490, 40534 KLH 40717, 40790, 41020, 41149 KLOSS 40533 KOSS LASONIC LECSON LENOXX LG LITEON LOEWE LOGIX MAGNASONIC 40651, 41061 40627, 40798 41533 41127 40591, 40741, 40801, 40869, 41600 41058, 41158, 41416, 41440 40741 40783 40651, 40675 40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40821, 41268 MARANTZ 40503, 40539, 40675, 41627 MCINTOSH 41533 MEDION 40651 MEMOREX 40695, 40831, 41270 MICROSOFT 40522, 41708 MINATO 40752 MINTEK 40839, 40717 MITSUBISHI 41521, 40521, 41403, 41629 NAD 40591, 40741 NAIKO 40770 NEC 40785, 40869, 41404 NESA 40717 NEXXTECH 41402 NORCENT 41003, 40872, 41107 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792, 41612, 41627 OPTIMUS 40571 ORION 41695 ORITRON 40651 PALSONIC 40672 PANASONIC 40503, 40490, 40571, 40703, 41010, 41011, 41282, 41362, 41462, 41490, 41632, 41641, 41762 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40854, 41260, 41267, 41354 PIANODISC 41024 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 40631, 40638, 41475, 41476, 41571 POLAROID 41020, 41061, 41086 POLK AUDIO 40539 PORTLAND 40770 PRESIDIAN 40675 PRIMA 41016 PROCEED 40672 PROSCAN 40522 PROVISION 40778 QWESTAR 40651 RADIONETTE 40741 RADIOSHACK 40571 RCA 40522, 40571, 40717, 40790, 40822, 41022, 41132 MAGNAVOX REALISTIC REOC RIO ROTEL ROWA SABA SAMPO SAMSUNG LD PLAYER CD PLAYER AIWA CARVER DENON ADC ADCOM AIWA AKAI 40203 40064 40059, 40172, 40241 DISCO VISION FUNAI HITACHI KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD OPTIMUS PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER QUASAR REALISTIC SEGA SHARP SONY TECHNICS TOSHIBA VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 40023 40203 40023 40236, 40258 40064, 40217, 40241 40064 40059, 40241 40059 40059 40204 40064 40059, 40023, 40241 40204 40203 40023 40001 40193, 40201 40204 40059 40245 40059 40217 DVD RECORDER ACCURIAN 51416 APEX DIGITAL 51056 ASPIRE DIGITAL 51168 COBY 51086 CYBERHOME 51129 DENON 50490 EMERSON 50675 FUNAI 50675 GATEWAY 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51304, 51730 HITACHI 51664, 51764 JVC 51164, 51275 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440 MAGNAVOX 50646, 50675 MITSUBISHI 51629 PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 POLAROID 51086 RCA 50522 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE 51158 SHARP 50630, 50675, 51556, 51642, 52002 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51431 SYLVANIA 50675 TOSHIBA 51510, 51639 VICTOR 51275 YAMAHA 52001 ZENITH 50741 60018 60234 60157 60083, 60643, 61688 ALBA 60625 ANAM NATIONAL 60362 ARCAM 60157 AUDIO RESEARCH 60157 CAIRN 60157 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 60157 CARVER 60157 CCE 60643 CLASSIC 61297 CURTIS MATHES 60032 DENON 60873, 60626, 60003, 60034, 60766 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 FISHER 60000, 61325 GEMINI 60625 GENEXXA 60032 GOLDSTAR 61208 GPX 61296 GRUNDIG 60157 HARMAN/KARDON 60100, 60157, 60083, 61202 HITACHI 60032 INKEL 60157, 60180 INTEGRA 60101 JERROLD 60003 JVC 60032, 60072, 61294 KENWOOD 60681, 60826, 60626, 60000, 60029, 60028, 60190, 61683 KOSS 61317 KRELL 60157 KYOCERA 60018 LG 61208 LINN 60157 LUXMAN 60328, 60489 MAGNAVOX 60157, 60038, 60274 MARANTZ 60626, 60029, 60157, 60038, 60180, 60373, 60435 MATSUI 60157 MCS 60029, 60043 MEMOREX 60000, 60032, 60468 MGA 60083 MICROMEGA 60157 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MITSUBISHI 60083, 60808 MODULAIRE 60000, 60032, 60087, 60180, 60468 MTC NAKAMICHI NEC NIKKO NSM ONKYO 60625 60147, 60373 60043, 60234 60362, 60625 60157 60868, 61327, 60101, 61685 OPTIMUS 61063, 60000, 60032, 60087, 60468 PANASONIC 60029, 60303, 60388, 60752, 61682 PENNEY 60029 PHILIPS 60626, 60157, 60274 PIONEER 61063, 61062, 60032, 61087, 60468 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOSHACK 60000, 60032, 60180, 60468 RCA 61062, 60032, 60053, 60468 REALISTIC 60000, 60032, 60087, 60180, 60468 REVOX 60157 ROKSAN 60435 ROTEL 60157 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60000, 60157 SANYO 60000, 60087 SHARP 60861, 60034, 60180, 61684 SHERWOOD 61067, 60180 SHURE 60043 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60490, 60000, 60100, 61364, 60185, 61790 STS 60018 SUGDEN 60157 SYLVANIA 60157 SYMPHONIC 60180 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TDK 61208 TEAC 60490, 60180, 60362 TECHNICS 60029, 60303 TECHWOOD 60303, 60362 THULE AUDIO 60157 TOSHIBA 61693, 61694 VICTOR 60072 WARDS 60032, 60157, 60053, 60087 YAMAHA 60490, 60868, 60888, 60036, 61292, 62000, 62001 YBA 60625 YORX 60000 viii APPENDIX 40571 40752 40869 40623 41004 40651 40752 40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899, 41044, 41075, 41599 SANSUI 40695, 41695 SANYO 40670, 40675, 40695, 41583 SCHNEIDER 40783 SCHWAIGER 40752 SENSORY SCIENCE 41158 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40752, 41256, 41556, 41642, 42002 SHARPER IMAGE 41117 SHERWOOD 40770 SHINSONIC 40533, 40839 SLIM ART 40784 SONIC BLUE 40573, 40783, 40869, 41099 SONY 40533, 41533, 40864, 40772, 41033, 41069, 41070, 41431, 41633 SUPERSCAN 40821 SVA 40717 SYLVANIA 40675, 40821, 41268 SYMPHONIC 40675, 40821, 41268 TATUNG 40770 TEAC 40571, 40717, 40790 TECHNICS 40490, 40703 TECHNIKA 40770 TEVION 40651 THETA DIGITAL 40571 THOMSON 40522 TOSHIBA 40503, 40573, 40539, 40695, 41045, 41154, 41510, 41595, 41639 UNIMAX 40770 UNIVERSUM 40591 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503, 40539 US LOGIC 40839 VENTURER 40790 VICTOR 41241, 41597 WYSE 41652 XBOX 40522, 41708 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 40545, 41282, 42000, 42001 YAMAKAWA 40872 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZEUS 40784 CD RECORDER CLASSIC 71297 DENON 70626 FISHER 71325 GPX 71296 HARMAN/KARDON 71202 JVC 71294 KENWOOD 70626 LG 71208 MARANTZ 70626 PHILIPS 70626 PIONEER 71062, 71087 RCA 70053 SONY 70000, 70100, 71364 TDK 71208 YAMAHA 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD ONKYO OPTIMUS PANASONIC PIONEER SHARP SHERWOOD SONY YAMAHA 70873 70681, 70826, 71683 70868, 71685 71063 71682 71063 70861, 71684 71067 70490, 71790 70490, 70888, 72001 TAPE DECK AIWA DENON 70197 70076, 70371, 70412 GARRARD 70308, 70309 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205, 70365 NIKKO 70365 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027 PANASONIC 70229 PIONEER 70027, 70099 RCA 70027 SHARP 70205, 70371, 70412 SONY 70243, 70170, 70291 TEAC 70308, 70309, 70365 TECHNICS 70229 TECHNOVOX 70229 TECHWOOD 70365 VICTOR 70273 WARDS 70027 YAMAHA 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ADC AIWA ALCO ANAM ARCAM AUDIO PRO ix 80531 81405, 80158, 80121, 81388, 81641 81390 81609, 81074 81189 80148 AUDIOTRONIC 81189 AUDIOVOX 81390 BOSE 81229, 81933 CAPETRONIC 80531 CARVER 81189, 80121 CURTIS MATHES 80014, 80080 DELPHI 81414, 81846 DENON 81360, 80121, 80386, 81142 EMERSON 80531 FISHER 80219 GARRARD 80281 GOLDSTAR 80281 GRUNDIG 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110 HITACHI 80386 INTEGRA 80135, 80842, 81298, 81320 JBL 80110 JVC 81058, 80074, 80262, 80464, 81374, 81495, 81665 KAWASAKI 81390 KENWOOD 80027, 80186, 80262 KLH 81390 LG 80281 MAGNAVOX 81189, 81269, 80531, 81266 MARANTZ 81189, 81269, 80039, 81671 MCS 80039 MICROMEGA 81189 MYRYAD 81189 ONKYO 80135, 80380, 80842, 81298, 81320, 81677 OPTIMUS 81023, 80158, 80074, 80014, 80080, 80121, 80186, 80219, 80531, 81074 PANASONIC 81308, 81518, 80039, 80367, 81275, 81288, 81316, 81548, 81633, 81675, 81763, 81764 PENNEY 80039 PHILIPS 81189, 81269, 81266 PIONEER 81023, 80014, 80080, 80150, 80281, 80531, 80630, 81284, 81384, 81678 POLK AUDIO 81414 PROSCAN 81254 QUASAR 80039 RADIOSHACK 81609 RCA 81023, 81609, 81254, 80080, 80531, 81074, 81390, 81511 REALISTIC 81609, 80158, 80121, 80186 SANSUI 81189, 80148, 81764 SANYO 80219 SHARP SONIC SONY 80186, 80262 80281 81058, 81441, 81258, 81759, 81622, 80158, 81406, 81558, 81658, 81758, 81858 STEREOPHONICS 81023 TEAC 81074, 81390 TECHNICS 81308, 81518, 80039, 81384, 81633, 81675 TECHWOOD 80281 THORENS 81189 TOSHIBA 80080, 80135, 80842 VENTURER 81390 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80158, 80014, 80080 XM 81406, 81414, 81846 YAMAHA 81023, 80176, 80186, 80376, 81176, 81276, 81331, 81375, 82004 (TUNER ID1) 82005 (TUNER ID2) 81949 (XM ID1) 82006 (XM ID2) 82007 ZENITH 80281 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 82001, 82002 82000 RX-V661_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 7:25 PM U RX-V661 RX-V661 AV Receiver © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WJ69940 00_Sheet_RX-V861_661_U.book Page 1 Friday, December 8, 2006 5:49 PM U RX-V861/RX-V661 ■ Front panel 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 2 1 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON A OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA B S VIDEO C D E F G H I J VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 00_Sheet_RX-V861_661_U.book Page i Friday, December 8, 2006 5:49 PM ■ Remote control U V W CODE SET POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R POWER STANDBY H MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL MD A G TRANSMIT I CBL DVD DTV TUNER XM DVR VCR PHONO DOCK V-AUX AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV J K P L TV MUTE TV INPUT CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 MUTE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO B STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT 5 6 7 SUR. DECODE NIGHT 9 0 10 TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE D E ENT SET MENU LEVEL ENHANCER STRAIGHT 5 6 SUR. DECODE NIGHT M 9 0 N Q R PURE DIRECT 7 8 S T 8 SLEEP PRESET/CH C PURE DIRECT ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY O XM MEMORY REC SCENE F 1 2 3 4 Printed in Malaysia a WK14480 U RX-V661 Page 35 (footnote *2) Incorrect *2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects “DOCK” as the input source automatically. Correct *2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. Printed in Malaysia WK52460